v>EPA

Canada
 RESEARCH
/INSTITUTE;
           United States
           Environmental Protection
           Agency
            Office of Research and
            Development
            Washington DC 20460
EPA/600/R-95/077
June 1995
           National Water Research Institute
           Burlington, Ontario, L7R 4A6, Canada
                                           0729ASD94
Laboratory Methods for
Soil and Foliar Analysis in
Long-Term Environmental
Monitoring Programs

-------

-------
                                                 EPA/600/R-95/077
                                                 June  1995
    Laboratory Methods for Soil and Foliar Analysis in
      long-Term Environmental Monitoring Programs
                                by
The Ad Hoc Terrestrial Monitoring Work Group of the Quality Assurance Subgroup
      Focusing on Monitoring the Terrestrial Effects of Acidic Deposition
         B. A. Schumacher, A. J. Neary, C. J. Palmer, D. G. Maynard,
                 L Pastorek, I. K. Morrison, and M. Marsh
               Prepared for the Quality Assurance Subgroup
                     John Lawrence, Co-Chairman
                      Serge Villard, Co-Chairman
                                               Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
                                      NOTICE

       The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Office of Research and Development (ORD),
Environment Canada, the Ministry of the Environment - Ontario, and the Canadian Department of
Natural Resources - Great Lakes Forestry Centre, Northern Forestry Centre, and Pacific Forestry
Centre have prepared and funded this methods manual. It has been peer reviewed by the Agency
and approved as an EPA publication.  Mention of trade names or commercial products does not
constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

-------
                             ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

     This methods manual was prepared as a joint effort between the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Environment  Canada, the Ministry of the Environment - Ontario, and  the  Canadian
Department of Natural Resources - Great Lakes Forestry Centre, Northern Forestry Centre, and
Pacific Forestry Centre.  In order to give proper acknowledgement for the efforts of each of the
authors, the following list has been prepared indicating the author, their affiliation, and which
chapters they prepared:
                                                                  Chapter(s) Prepared
Brian A. Schumacher  ,                                             Introduction, 6, 9
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory
Analytical Sciences Division                                   \
P.O. Box 93478
Las Vegas, Nevada  89193-3478
USA                                                        I
Craig J. Palmer
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory
Monitoring Sciences Division
P.O. Box 93478
Las Vegas, Nevada 89193-3478
USA

Anne J. Neary
Ministry of the Environment - Ontario
125 Resources Road
Etobocoke, Ontario M3P 3V6
CANADA

Douglas G. Maynard
Department of Natural Resources
Northern Forestry Centre
5320 122nd Street
Edmonton, Alberta T6H 3S5
CANADA

Liz Pastorek
Ministry of the Environment - Ontario
125 Resources Road
Etobicoke. Ontario M3P 3V6
CANADA
Introduction, 7, 12, 13
GLP, 14, 15, 16, 19
3, 4, 10, 17, 18, 20
3, 4, 5, 10, 20
                                           HI

-------
Ian K. Morrison
Department of Natural Resources
Great Lakes Forestry Centre
P.O. Box 490
Sautte Ste. Marie. Ontario  P6A 5M7
CANADA

MarRjs Marsh
Ministry of the Environment - Ontario
125 Resources Road
Etobfcoke, Ontario  M3P3V6
CANADA
8
11

                                          iv

-------
                                                              Table of Contents
                                                              Version:     2.1
                                                              Date:        May 22,1995
                                                                           1of 1
                                  Table of Contents
Chapter
                                                                          Page   Revision
    Notice	jj
    Acknowledgements	 iii

 1.  Introduction	1 of 2       2.1
 2.  Good Laboratory Practices	:	i'Of 14      n
 3.  Total Nitrogen in Plant Tissue	•'...'	1 of 6       2.1
 4.  Total Sulphur in Plant Tissue	 1 of 7       2.1
 5.  P, Mn, Fe, Al, Ca, Mg, and K in Plant Tissue	1 of 7       2.1
 6.  Particle-Size Analysis	 1 of 20      2.1
 7-  Soil pH	i of 6       2.1
 8.  Organic Carbon  	,	1 of 8       2.1
 9.  Total Carbon	1 of 7       1.1
10.  Total Nitrogen	-j of 5       2.1
11.  Extractable  Phosphorus	1 of 7       2.1
12.  Cation Exchange Capacity  	:	1 of 12      2.1
13.  Exchangeable Cations	1 of 11       2.1
14.  Amorphous  Iron and Aluminum Oxides	1 of 7       2.1
15.  Organic Iron and Aluminum	1 of 10      2.1
16.  Iron and Aluminum Oxides  	i	;.. 1 of 7       2.1
17.  Phosphate Extractable Sulphate	1 of 8       2.1
18.  Ammonium Chloride Extractable Sulphate	1 of 8       2.1
19.  Water Extractable Sulphate	1 of 8       1.1
20.  Total Sulphur in Soil	1 of 6       2.1

-------

-------
                                                              Introduction
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
2.1
May 22, 1995
1of 2
                 Analytics/ Methods for Terrestrial Samples


 Introduction

      The  success of long-term environmental  monitoring studies, such as those designed to
 measure the effects of the long range transport of atmospheric pollutants, will depend on the type
 of data collected and the comparability of the data over the course of the monitoring period. Data
 comparability will depend on collection and analysis procedures as well as the natural spatial and
 temporal variability of the soil and vegetation. The objective of this document is to present methods
 for the collection, preparation, and analysis of soil and plant tissue samples taken as part of a lona-
 term study to evaluate the effects of acid rain on terrestrial systems.

      The objective of the terrestrial monitoring program  is to measure real changes caused by
 acidic precipitation.  Unfortunately, these changes can be hidden by natural spatial and temporal
 variability or variability resulting from errors or changes in the measurement process. Spatial and
 temporal variability can be addressed through proper sampling designs.  Measurement errors can
 be minimized through quality assurance protocols, such as the development of consistent analytical
 techniques.  It is hoped that this  report  will assist in  selecting and documenting appropriate
 analytical methodologies.


 Quality Assurance and Quality Control


      Quality assurance may be defined as "a system of activities whose purpose is to provide to
 the producer or user of a product or service the assurance that it meets defined standards of quality
 ^ ™tated level of confidence" (Taylor, 1987).  The goal of the quality assurance/quality control
 (QA/QC) procedures presented in this  manual is  to ensure that the data collected for  a given
 parameter is of the highest integrity and that the data quality can be evaluated and documented.

      To ensure the  integrity and comparability of analyses among various laboratories,  several
 quality control procedures have been presented in each of the methods. These procedures deal with
 the assessment of precision and accuracy and the use of method blanks, quality control preparation
 samples (QCPS), and quality control check samples (QCCS). Within each method, acceptance limits
 and frequency of use within an analytical batch of these QC samples has been presented. Further,
 a suggested run format has been presented showing a potential distribution of the QC samples
 within the analytical run.

      To assess analytical precision, at least one sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each
 run of thirty samples or  less.  In sample  batches that are  expected to  have large  analyte
 concentration fluctuations, additional duplicate samples are recommended (recommended rate is
 1 duplicate sample per 10 routine samples) to assess  precision. To avoid bias associated with
 position within the run,  non-adjacent duplicate analysis  is recommended.  For example, if the
 suggested run format indicates to run the duplicate sample after the 16th routine sample (i.e., in the
 middle of the run), therefore, the associated replicated sample should be selected from the first
 (sample numbers 1 to 8) or last (sample number 26 to 30) group of routine samples.

      Accuracy can be assessed through the use of standard reference materials (SRMs). For many
of the methods presented in this manual, SRMs are not available from commercial sources.  SRMs
are available for total elemental analyses, such as total carbon,  in vegetation and soil samples.
Accuracy checks, however, for extractable soil parameters  (preparation + analysis) can be created
by using the median values of large Intel-laboratory round-robin studies with soil samples prepared

-------
                                                              Introduction
                                                              Version:     2.1
                                                              Date:        May 22, 1995
                                                              Page:        2 of 2


and shipped strictly for that purpose.  Where available, accuracy standards are recommended to
be run in the middle of the analytical run.                                        .

     Method blanks are analyzed to assess if contamination of the sample or sample extracts has
occurred. Contamination can occur from numerous sources, such as glassware, filters and reagents
used during sample preparation or analysis.  It is recommended that 3 or more method blanks be
analyzed at the beginning, middle, and end of the run. If contamination is identified within the run
(i.e., the method blank has a concentration greater than the instrument detection limit), two courses
of action can be taken.  First, rerun the blank to ensure  that the value is above the instrument
detection limit.  If the method blank  still indicates contamination is present,  then all samples
between the last "non-contaminated" blank and the contaminated blank should be rerun until no
contamination is indicated in the new method blank (i.e., the method blank prepared during the rerun
of the routine samples). The second course of action occurs for those methods where significant
preparation is involved in the  blanks and thus detectable  analyte  concentrations will occur in the
method blanks.  In this  situation, if all the routine sample concentrations are significantly higher
(e.g., 10 times greater) than the blank, analyses should continue with a blank correction occurring
on the final sample results  using the mean blank value.  In cases  where the blank and the routine
samples are close in measured concentrations, then the decision should be made by the laboratory
manager on whether to  reanalyze or accept the results.

     The QCPS is a matrix  matched in-house quality control sample used to monitor accuracy and
long-term between-run precision. This  sample should be a soil sample that has been collected and
prepared in bulk and analyzed numerous times through time and across projects/programs.  After
each analysis, the resultant analyte concentrations should be incorporated into the database and
a new accuracy window developed for that sample.  Over a  long period of time, the median value
or long-term mean may approximate the "true" value for the sample. Ideally, more  than one QCPS
should be obtained to better characterize the routine analytical range and sample type analyzed (i.e.,
sandy, silty, clayey, and organic soils).  Further statistical  significance and value of the QCPS, can
be obtained by submitting  the sample through interlaboratory round-robin testing. One QCPS is
recommended to be analyzed per run.

     The QCCS is a matrix  matched standard solution containing the analyte of interest at a known
concentration in the mid-calibration range. The QCCS is analyzed to verify the calibration curve (i.e.,
to monitor and correct for instrumental drift) and should be analyzed at the beginning, after every
ten samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. This sample should be prepared from
a different  stock solution than that used to prepare the initial instrument calibration standards and
should not been taken through any preparation step.


References

Taytor, J.K. 1987. Quality assurance  of chemical measurements. Lewis Pub., Chelsea, MI. 328 pp.

-------
                                                              GLP
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
1of 14
                            Good Laboratory Practices
 Introduction
      Providing the client with the best possible data of known and acceptable quality (i.e., with a
 specified probability of being correct).must be of foremost concern in the analytical laboratory.
 Good laboratory practices may be defined as a group of operations or procedures which comprise
 quality assurance within the laboratory, and which are integral to achieving and maintaining the high
 quality of output from any laboratory. These operations and procedures should become the code
 of behaviour in the laboratory. They apply to workload planning and receiving; data quality objective
 setting and sample  representativeness; documentation;  personnel  training;  sample  storage.
 preservation, and preparation; laboratory cleanliness; equipment maintenance; laboratory safety-
 instrument calibration; and analytical quality control  protocols.  >ks part of the commitment to
 quality, staff must be aware of their responsibilities, policies and procedures must be documented
 and distributed, and the channels of communication between the client and laboratory staff must
 remain open.  This chapter is meant as a general guide for  laboratory managers  and supervisors.
 It is designed for the laboratory performing routine tests on soil and foliar samples. It does not
 provide for  unusual samples or complex analytical techniques requiring specialized facilities or
 equipment (e.g., work requiring "clean room11 procedures, radioactive or highly toxic substances, etc.).


 Workload Planning and Receiving

      Workload planning and sample scheduling is necessary to ensure that the client receives
 hisyher results in a timely manner and that perishable samples are  analyzed without undue delay
 (e.g., field moist samples). Any laboratory providing an analytical service must have available space,
 staff,  necessary facilities,  and  documented procedures  for sample reception,  log-in,  and
 preservation. The latter may include soil and foliar tissue drying, freezing, refrigerating, freeze drying,
 and storage. A method of tracking samples as they pass through ihe laboratory is also required.
 This is usually done by assigning a unique laboratory number or label to the sample.  The protocol
 should be documented to guarantee consistency between laboratory personnel and within sample
 types. The number or label must be traceable to the original field sample number, client, and date
 of receipt at the laboratory. - The chain  of custody for each sample must be known so  that the
 sample's disposition at any time can be determined.  Having the analyst initial a form when samples
 are removed from and returned to their place of storage and initial tho bench sheet after completion
 of an analysis  helps to track the progression of samples through the laboratory.
Data  Quality Objectives and Sample Representativeness

     The data quality required (sensitivity and coefficient of variation at ail levels of detection) must
be established by the client at the outset of the study.  This allows the project and laboratory

-------
                      •                                       GLP
                                                             Version:     1.1
                                                             Date:        May 22,1995
                                                             Page:        2 of 14


managers to work together to achieve these objectives.  For the data user, it is critical that the
sample is representative of the environment  under observation. It is th'e responsibility of the
sampler and project manager to provide samples which best represent  the environment being
measured. For some purposes, a single sample or a homogenized or composite sample prepared
from a series of separate samples may be adequate.  More frequently, however, the collection of
replicate samples from the same sampling location is necessary to obtain a measure of variability
in the field. These field replicates must not be confused with laboratory replicates or "sample splits"
which are analyzed routinely in the laboratory to provide a measure of analytical precision.

     It is the responsibility of the laboratory analyst to ensure that the method-provides data of
acceptable quality and that this quality is not  compromised by the use of  inappropriate sampling
containers, preservatives, storage facilities, or handling procedures.  Moreover, it is important that
both the laboratory analyst and client know the limitations of the analytical procedures used.

     Environmental studies usually require considerable planning. Both the laboratory manager and
project manager or client must have input and assume responsibility for ensuring  that the project
data quality objectives are met.
 Documentation

      The importance of properly documenting procedures in the laboratory cannot be overstated.
 Written sample handling, preparation and analytical procedures, maintenance and safety guidelines,
 and analytical quality control records should be available.  This documentation is required for the
 laboratory to establish its credibility; however, it does not, in itself, guarantee that the procedures
 are properly followed or that the data produced are of the quality specified. Training and ongoing
 evaluation of method performance is also needed.
 Staff Training

      Laboratory training programs are necessary for all new laboratory personnel and existing staff
 whose duties in the lab are changing. The theory and rationale for existing procedures should be
 covered in detail.
 Sample Preparation

      Soil and foliar sample preservation and storage may consist of refrigeration, freezing, freeze
 drying, air drying, or oven drying. When the analysis requires field moist samples and the samples
 cannot be analyzed immediately, refrigeration at 2 to 4° C or freezing at -20° C is recommended.
 Refrigerated samples should be analyzed within one or two days of receipt.  The analysis of field-
 moist soil samples is often dictated by the project objectives or the tests requested.  Irreversible

-------
                                                               GLP
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 14
                             °an °CCUr 3S 3 result °f dryFn9- Par^arly in organic soil horizons
                                 T* *"" "* Maynard' 1"1)"  M°St methods described j" «•
                                f°"ar  SampISS  and« *«•"*>* Notices re,ated to their
  Soils
       Samples should be dried on non-metallic trays or plastic sheets in an area free from airborne
 dust and chemical fumes. Sample drying and grinding/sieving shoulld not be performed in the same
  ?™\  £* ~mpS °r C'°dS Sh°uld ** broken by hand *° faci«tate drying. Samples should be dried
 at 20 to 25° C until a constant mass is attained.  Unless specifically requested to do otherwise
 samples are disaggregated and sieved.  Only the material passing a 2 mm sieve  is used for
 analysis  The > 2 mm material is  retained and its weight recorded. The whole sample should be
      Some tests, those measuring total amounts of an element or those requiring a very small
 sample aliquot, require a homogeneous finely-ground sample.  Grinding to < 35 mesh (500 urn) is
 recommended for some of the methods outlined in this manual.  When grinding a subsample to
 pass a specified mesh size, the following steps should be performed:

      • The sample should be well mixed before a subsample  is removed.

      • The subsample should be sieved first to remove all material that is naturally less than the
        mesh size used.

      • The subsample should be ground  using an  agate mortar and pestle (to prevent AT
        contamination) for short time periods.  Frequent re-sieving  is necessary until the whole
        subsample passes through the sieve. This prevents biasing the sample by discarding any
        portion of the sample which is difficult to grind, and  it prevents over-grinding of minerals
        Over-grinding is not a problem if total amounts of an element are measured, but can be a
        problem for the measurement of extractable Fe and Al  (Neary and  Barnes, 1993).

Foliar Tissue

     Foliar samples should be dried in a forced draft oven at between 70 and 80° C. Lower drying
temperatures should be used if volatilization is of concern. Dried samples are ground to pass a 20
mesh (850 /^m) sieve. Large samples  may be. first ground through a Wiley Mill using a 10 mesh (2
mm) sieve and then reduced by quartering  and put into an Intermediate Wiley Mill or Tecator
Cyclotec (Kalra and  Maynard, 1991). These samples may be used for  the determination of N, P, K,
Ca, Mg, Na, and S. A non-metallic grinder is recommended if Fe, Mn, Cu and Zn are to be measured.
Samples should be transferred to non-metallic storage containers and tightly sealed for storage.

-------
                                                             GLP
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 14
Laboratory Cleanliness

     Laboratory cleanliness encompasses everything from  maintaining an organized workplace
within the  laboratory to the quality of  the  air, water  supply, and  reagents.  A  well-designed
laboratory in terms of workstation location helps avoid accidents and reduces the chance of sample
contamination from labware and reagents used for other tests.  Shared equipment (balances,
centrifuges, water baths, block digesters, stirrers, vortex mixers, shakers, etc.) should be thoroughly
cleaned after each use to prevent sample contamination and salt build-up from sample extracting
and digesting solutions.  Similarly, the sample path in analytical instruments should be thoroughly
rinsedfl lushed with deionized water after each use. This will extend the life of the instrument and
prevent contamination of the next batch of samples analyzed. Burner heads from atomic absorpt.on
spectrophotometers should be cleaned after each use to prevent salt build-up.  When equipment
must be shared, it is advisable that all batches of one test be completed before another batch ,s
started.

     When cleaning glassware and plasticware consideration must be given to the expected analyte
concentrations in the sample. All new glassware and plasticware should be cleaned with soap and
water.   A contaminant-free detergent, such  as  Decon  or  Acationox, which  rinses  well  is
recommended. Three short rinses with distilled/deionized water after washing are preferable to one
long rinse. For trace element analysis, labware should be soaked in nitric acid before use. Separate
labware should be used for the analysis of soil and foliar tissue. More rigorous cleaning procedures
and separation of labware is required if sub-mg/L levels are to be measured.

      The quality of the air in the laboratory is important for the safety of the staff and to prevent
contamination of the samples.  All instruments and equipment should be vented according to the
 manufacturer's specifications.  Instrument vents and fume hoods should be checked on a routine
 basis so that airborne contamination in the form of fumes or dust is prevented. So.l drying sievmg
 and grinding should not be performed in the same room used for sample extraction/digestion and
 analysis. Even the weighing of dried samples can generate a significant amount of dust and shou d
 be done in an area removed from sample analysis. Soil samples and vegetation samples should
 be weighed and analyzed in different locations.

      A source of purified water is essential to the analytical laboratory. Laboratories having an on-
 line supply of purified water should check the conductivity of the water regularly Per,od,c checking
 of the analyte of interest can be done by analyzing the purified water as a blank sample ,n_the run
 This might be in addition to the matrix-matched  method blanks  which are part of each batch of
 samples analyzed.  If water purification (distillation, deionization, etc.)  ,s done by the laboratory
 staff, regular maintenance schedules  and procedures must be documented and  foltowedL  A
 conductivity of below 1 /,S cm'1 for freshly purified water is suitable for most soil and vegetate
 ^alyses. if the conductivity of the water is  above 2/,S cm'1, the water should not be used until the
 system is inspected and  cleaned.  The conductivity of purified water sitting in carboys  or ong
 Periods will gradually increase to between 1  and 3 /,S cm'1 as ions are leached from the walls of the

-------
                                                              GUP
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
5 of 14
 container. If an on-line deionized water tap is present, it may be advisable to discard the first three
 litres of water at the beginning of each work day (Robarge and Fernandez, 1986). In cases where
 NH+4 or NO"3-free water is required, amine-based deionizing cartridges may be a source of error.
 Cleaning  of cartridges with formaldehyde has  also been found to contribute  to contamination
 problems.

      Reagents must be free of contamination by the analyte. New batches of reagents should be
 checked prior to their use.  Matrix-matched blank solutions prepared with the new reagent should
 be checked against blanks prepared with the old batch of reagent.  Fleagents not meeting the purity
 requirements should be labelled as such and either discarded or stored separately.  Special purity
 requirements for reagents or dilution water be  must documented  in  the standard operating
 procedure.
 Reagent Traceability                                 \

      All reagents must be dated upon receipt at the laboratory and on opening to prevent prolonged
 storage of reagents beyond their estimated shelf-life (Robarge and Fernandez, 1986).  Prepared
 reagents should be labelled with the solution name, concentration, date of preparation, and name
 of person preparing the reagent. In Canada, WHMIS (Workplace Hazardous Material Information
 System) labelling is a requirement for all bought or prepared reagents. WHMIS legislation also sets
 strict regulations for the storage of chemicals. The laboratory manager must make sure that all
 staff receive WHMIS training.

      All powders used for primary standard and reagent preparatiion should be numbered upon
 receipt and all stock solutions and reagents prepared using that powder should be numbered and
 have a paper  trail back to the batch of chemical used.  Similarly, all intermediate and working
 solutions should be traceable to their source. If certified stock solutions are used instead of neat
 chemical powders for standard preparation, all solutions prepared from these  stocks should be
 traceable back to the original bottle used. When the stock powder or purchased stock solution is
 discarded or exhausted, records should be kept and the replacement given a new and unique
 number upon  receipt.  This rigorous record  keeping  will  greatly simplify trouble-shooting  for
 problems, such as reagent contamination, sensitivity irregularities, calibration errors, etc.
Equipment Maintenance

     An equipment maintenance schedule can extend the life of an instrument, reduce repair costs,
and maximize instrument performance.  Equipment is often shared by many users in the laboratory.
It is advisable, therefore, to assign one person the responsibility of maintaining a given piece of
equipment. Although all operators should be trained to run daily safety and performance checks
before use and to clean the instrument after use, sharing the routine maintenance of the instrument
among operators does not work well. This is especially true for sophisticated instrumentation such

-------
                                                             GLP
                                                             Version:     1.1
                                                             Date:       May 22,1995
                                                             Page:       60! 14


as atomic  absorption  spectrophotometers, ICP emission spectrometers, ion chromatographs,
continuous flow systems, carbon analyzers,  and X-ray fluorescence  spectrometers.  Detailed
equipment maintenance procedures, schedules, and performance checks are usually provided by the
manufacturer.  Below  are some general guidelines  for maintaining and using equipment most
commonly found in the soil/vegetation laboratory.

     As much as possible, instruments should be located in areas free from dust and fumes.
Although most analytical instruments are sealed and protected from dust and laboratory chemicals,
a dust cover is advised when the equipment is not in use, especially in particularly corrosive or dusty
environments.  Reagents should never be stored on the top of instruments.  The level  of waste
containers located under instruments should be closely monitored. The pressure on pump lines of
continuous flow systems  should be  released when not in use.  All filters and traps on atomic
absorption spectrophotometers, ICP's,  carbon  and sulphur  analyzers,  etc. should be  checked,
cleaned, and replaced regularly. Ion chromatograph pumps, and sample chambers and lines on all
instruments  should be rinsed well after use, especially if strong salt solutions are  used. The
performance of automated shut-down mechanisms should be checked regularly.

      Weighing samples and reagents is a daily activity in the soil/vegetation laboratory.  Balances
are often used intermittently throughout the day by many lab personnel.  The balance should always
be cleaned after each  use. Even when sample or chemical spillage does not occur, the weighing
of finely ground soil and vegetation samples will leave a film of dust on the balance. The balance
pan should be removed and the whole balance cleaned after each use with a camel-hair or other
soft-haired brush.  Wiping with a moist cloth should be done only after brushing to prevent
scratching and smearing of the balance with moistened sediment.

      Balances should be located away from drafts  caused by nearby doors, heating  and cooling
vents, exhaust fans for instruments, fume hoods, centrifuges etc. A balance table is recommended
even though the newer four-place balances are particularly stable. If the balance must be located
on the laboratory bench,  centrifuges, vacuum pumps, stirrers, or any equipment likely to cause
vibration, should not be used on the bench at the same time. Balances should be routinely checked
 for accuracy using a certified set of weights. Occasional recalibration may be necessary.  Balances
 should be turned on in the morning and left on throughout the day.

      Centrifuge heads and shakers should be cleaned on a regular basis to avoid salt build-up from
 extracting solutions. This build-up may not only contaminate other samples but will eventually cause
 pitting of the metal centrifuge head, weakening it, and making it unsafe. Samples must always be
 placed in the centrifuge in a  manner to  ensure that it is balanced and the centrifuge should never
 be opened when in use.

      Aluminum block digesters are  often used for strong acid digestions of soil and vegetation.
 These  must be used in a fume hood and all non-aluminum hardware (e.g., screws, handles, rivets,
 etc.) on either the block  itself or side covers should be  regularly checked for corrosion by acid
 fumes. Metal contamination from such corroded surfaces is possible. Controllers for the block
 should be located outside the fume  hood.


-------
                                                               GLP
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 14
      Maintenance of pH meters consists primarily of proper electrode care. Combination electrodes
 should be kept adequately filled with saturated KCI solution.  Loose KCI crystals should be present
 at the bottom of the electrode and air bubbles should not be present.  The rubber sleeve should
 cover the filling hole when the electrode is not in  use.  Storage buffers and cleaning solutions
 recommended by the manufacturer should be used.  The  electrode should be rinsed between
 samples using a stream of deionized water.  Wiping of the electrode with laboratory tissue is not
 recommended.                                                !
 Laboratory Safety

      A laboratory safety manual should be available and read by all laboratory personnel.  In
 Canada, all laboratory personnel are required to undergo WHMIS draining.  This training provides
 information on storage, labelling and use of chemicals, chemical waste disposal, and transportation.
 WHMIS Material Safety Data  Sheets (MSDS)  must be available for all chemicals used in the
 laboratory.

      Safe laboratory practices for all the analytical procedures outlined in this manuaj cannot be
 covered here; however, some general principles of laboratory safety should be mentioned. Specific
 safety precautions during  an analysis should be outlined in the (Standard operating procedure.
 Instrument operating manuals, provided by the manufacturer, usually outline safety requirements
 and should always be kept with the instrument.  Emergency shut-down procedures for instruments
 should be posted.  Safe laboratory practices must never be compromised for the sake of decreasing
 sample throughput time. Personnel should develop a positive attitude toward safety.
                                                              i
      Fire extinguishers, eye wash stations, safety showers, first-aid kits and chemical spill kits
 should be present and easily accessible in all laboratory areas. Laboratory evacuation procedures
 should be known and practiced by all staff.  Fire escape routes must ba marked and kept clear of
 carts, equipment, gas cylinders, coat racks,  etc.  Extreme  care must be exercised  when handling
 flammable or potentially explosive materials (e.g., acetyiides, perchlorates, azides, ozonides, and
 peroxides).  Flammable materials  should be stored separately in specially designed metal storage
 cabinets and carried in safety cans.  Concentrated acids and bases should be stored in specially
 designed vented cabinets and transported in safety bottle carriers. All cylinders must be properly
 secured and the tank pressure not allowed to drop below the recommended level.  Acids and organic
 solutions must be stored separately. Storing powdered reagents in alphabetical order, a practice
 commonly seen in  the laboratory,  should not be done.  Oxidizing and reducing agents must not be
 put together. Staff should receive  training in the cleaning of chemical spills  and emergency contact
 numbers should be readily available. First aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) training for
 staff is also recommended.

     The  importance of proper  analytical technique (e.g., pipetting, preparing  solutions  with
concentrated acids or bases)  and the use of personal  safety  equipment such  as lab coats,
chemical-resistant  aprons,  gloves, and eye  protection must  be emphasized by the laboratory

-------
                                                             GLP
                                                             Version:     1.1
                                                             Date:        May 22, 1995
                                                             Page:        8 of 14


supervisor. Wearing contact lenses in the laboratory is not advised and open-toed shoes should
not be worn.  Food and drink should not be consumed or stored in the  laboratory.  Smoking is
prohibited by law.

     Equipment or procedures emitting chemical fumes should be vented to the atmosphere. This
includes  atomic  absorption  spectrophotometers,  ICP  emission spectrometers, muffle and
combustion furnaces, and  microwave ovens.  Fume  hoods should be  used only  to  perform
operations for which they were designed.  For example,  if  perchloric acid  is used, a specially
designed stainless steel hood without any exposed organic material or sealer and with a proper
washdown facility is required.  Fume hoods should be washed down regularly and not modified
without the manufacturer's approval (e.g., removal of baffles).  The ventilation efficiency of the hood
should be measured with the sash in its normal position under routine working conditions.

     Most laboratory accidents are a result of failing to observe  basic safety precautions. Each
worker should ultimately be responsible for his/her own safety  and each laboratory supervisor
should try to maintain a safely designed  laboratory and ensure than laboratory staff have access
to all necessary safety equipment and information.


Analytical Quality Control

     As part of quality assurance within the laboratory, good laboratory practices must include
quality control protocols for ensuring that an analytical method is operating as expected and meets
the predefined data quality objectives. Continual review of these protocols and performance data
will help to identify problems early in the  analytical process.  Corrective actions can then be taken
with minimal loss of data to the client.

Method Development

      Method development  is the set of  experimental procedures designed to measure a  known
amount of a substance in various matrices.  Method development ensures and demonstrates that
the extraction of the substance and response of the measurement system to that substance follows
a specific behaviour in a predictable, reliable, and stable fashion.  The sample matrix used in the
development process must represent the type of samples which  will be analyzed routinely.  The
ruggedness and application of a method to the sample matrix for which it is intended must be
determined and the predefined data quality objectives met before the method is adopted. All known
interferences and shortcomings should be listed  in the standard operating  procedure and made
available to the data user.

      A measure of single-operator precision is required before comparison with data obtained by
other analysts and other methods. Inter-laboratory comparisons are useful and should be continued
even after the method is brought "on-line". When changes or  improvements to a method are made,
all changes and dates of changes must be documented. An  overlap period when the old and new

-------
                                                              GLP
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
9 of 14
 methods are run concurrently is necessary until the data collected are representative of all types of
 samples received.  Differences in sample values and daily performance checks should be monitored
 and the methods evaluated. The client/data user must be told how the methods compare so that
 historical data may still be useable.

 Method Documentation                                  \

      The  written procedure should include all sample preparation  and clean-up steps, detailed
 description  of  the measurement  system including  instrumental conditions  and adjustments,
 calibration procedures, performance checks, safety practices, performance characteristics, and data
 limitations (Ontario Ministry of the Environment, 1986).

 Calibration

      Calibration of the measurement system with more than two standards of known concentration
 should be performed  before the analysis of  every batch of samples.   It is advisable to prepare
 calibration solutions from a primary standard.  A primary  standard is a substance of high purity,
 with the purity known to within very close limits. These  standards should be validated against
 certified reference  standards (e.g., National Institute of Standards and Technology or MIST) and
 traceable to the validation.
                                                             's
      Calibration is performed to establish the relationship between instrument response and analyte
 concentration on that  particular day.  Calibration establishes the linearity of the analytical system.
 Sudden changes in the slope and intercept of the calibration curve from day to day should not be
 expected and, therefore, the slope  and intercept should be monitored with each standardization.
 If these changes occur,  insufficient instrument warm-up time, instrument  degradation, reagent
 quality, or error in standard preparation may be the cause.
                                                             .i
      Working analytical standards are prepared from stock solutions. The concentration of the
 stock solution should be high  enough that  pipetting of  less than  1  mL to produce a working
 standard is unnecessary.  Working standards should be prepared daily if  their concentrations are
 less than 1 mg/L or if the standards are prepared in a matrix where prolonged storage may cause
 changes in the results.

 Calibration Performance  Checks - Accuracy and Precision

 Internal Reference Checks

     Quality control check standards (QCCS) should be used  to check  the accuracy of the
calibration. These standards should be prepared from a different primary standard than was  used
in the creation of the calibration standards, or at least a different batch number of the same primary
standard.  Using a solution in the low and high end of the calibration range is advisable. Sufficient
volumes of each quality control solution should be prepared to last through several batches of

-------
                                                              GLP
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
10 of 14
calibration  standards.   The concentrations of these solutions  should  be read each  time  the
instrument  is calibrated and the measurements should be recorded.  This record provides data
which can be used to calculate the between-run precision of the measurement system separately
from sample preparation  precision.  Limits on this precision  may be set and used to identify
calibration problems.  In addition to the quality control solutions, a long-term blank comprised of
the dilution matrix used to prepare the quality control solutions will provide a check on the zero
standard or intercept of the calibration curve and the purity of the reagents and distilled/deionized
water used.

External Reference Checks

     Externally  prepared, certified  control  solutions,   such  those  obtained  from  the  U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, may also be analyzed periodically to provide an accuracy check.
Routine participation in an inter-laboratory comparison study gives the analyst an indication of how
well his/her laboratory performs with respect to others.

Interference Checks

     An interference in the analysis may occur when a substance other than the analyte is present
in amounts sufficient to affect the results.  Interferences are often identified during the method
development stage and steps to prevent these  interferences are built into the procedure.  During
routine  operation, checks may  be used to monitor the effectiveness  of  the methodological
safeguards used to prevent the interference. Interference checks should be close to the threshold
level of the  substance found to affect the results. Good laboratory practices require that the analyst
carry out all cross checks available, based on the knowledge of the sample source and matrix, to
provide  for the accurate identification and  quantification of the parameter being measured.

Sensitivity and Baseline Checks

     Changes in the sensitivity of the instrument should be monitored periodically (e.g., every tenth
sample) by analyzing a standard and comparing the peak height to the original calibration.  Any
change  must be considered  when calculating the results. Periodic analysis of a blank, matrix
matched to the standards and samples, may be used to monitor baseline drift.

Method Performance Checks - Accuracy and Precision
Method Blanks

      With each batch of samples, three method blanks (reagents only without sample) should be
carried through the entire procedure. These provide a measure of contamination from all possible
sources (reagents, labware, filter paper, handling etc.).  The contribution of only the reagents and
instrumental analysis to the overall contamination can be determined from the zero standard and

-------
                                                               GLP
                                                              ; Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                              SPage:
1.1
May 22, 1995
11 of 14
 long term blank.   The mean blank value  should be subtracted from the sample result  before
 reporting the final parameter concentration.

 Internal Reference Checks

      "Total" elemental analyses are not usually performed on soil samples, with the exception of
 total C, N, P, and S.  For most purposes,  specific fractions or forms of elements are extracted.
 These fractions may have been found to relate well to plant growth or soil genesis. As a result, the
 accuracy of the method cannot be routinely checked by using spike recoveries. As previously
 mentioned, the accuracy of the measurement system can'be controlled. However, the accuracy or
 specificity of the  extraction/digestion  for a  particular form of the analyte  in the soil must be
 determined in the method development stage.  For total measurements (especially on foliage),
 spiked samples may be used to measure recovery.  In this case, the spike should be twice the
 endogenous level or ten times the detection limit, whichever is greater. The analyst should note that
 the chemical form of the element in the spike may be different than the naturally occurring form in
 the  soil/foliage. This, in turn,  may lead to invalid conclusions  about  recovery from the sample.
 When interferences are  indicated by the spike recovery, standard additions may be  useful for
 accurately determining the amount of analyte present in the sample.

      The reproducibility of the method between  batches prepared ori different days may be termed
 the between-run precision and is measured by replicate control samples.  Large amounts of soil or
 foliar tissue should be collected, dried, and ground as required for the test and analyzed with each
 run of samples. The sample volume should be sufficient for at leasl a year, if not more, of routine
 operation.  More than one of these between-run control samples should be prepared to represent
 the low and high  part of the analytical range  and different sample matrices (e.g., organic and
 mineral soil or different vegetation species).  If run over a long period, the standard deviation of the
 results of these samples will provide a measure of between-run precision. Control limits may be
 set at two or three standard deviations from  the  long-term mean of the results.  Samples failing
 outside these limits may indicate problems  in batch preparation. If, changes  in the analyte occur
 due to storage of the control sample over long  periods, the change may be detected more easily
 by plotting the results on a control chart. A systematic increase or decrease in the values over time
 may indicate an unstable sample,  or  in the case of  soil, a sample which  may no longer be
 homogenous, but which has settled and become sorted.  Ensure proper mixing/homogenization prior
 to weighing the sample each day.

     The reproducibility of a method within the same batch of samples prepared on a specific day
may be called the within-run precision.  Some samples within the batch (e.g., every tenth sample)
are prepared in duplicate.  The run format should be  such that the duplicate samples are not
analyzed side by side within the run. This will eliminate possible bias resulting from position in the
run.  Standard deviations of the duplicates can be determined using the following equation:

-------
                                                              GLP
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
12 of 14
                                               2/7
       where: S = standard deviation of the difference between duplicate pairs,
              n - number of duplicate pairs, and
              (x, - x-j), = difference of the /th duplicate.

Acceptable duplicate data should conform to limits which are based on historical performance.

External Reference Checks

     Certified reference soil and vegetation samples are available from NIST (formerly the National
Bureau of Standards or NBS) and can be run as an accuracy check.  Inter-laboratory comparisons
provide a good indication of your  performance as it compares to other laboratories.  Informal
comparisons can usually easily be  arranged by contacting the laboratory supervisor. The Council
on Soil Testing and Plant Analysis based at the University of Georgia provides  a soil and plant
laboratory registry which may be used to obtain a list of laboratories doing similar work in Canada
and the United States. In Canada, the Expert Committee on Soil Survey (ECSS), Agriculture Canada,
Land Resource Research Centre, Ottawa Ontario conducts soil round-robins.  Similarly, the QA
Subgroup of the Research Monitoring Coordination Committee of the federal Long  Range Transport
of Air Pollutants (LRTAP) program  conducts a foliage round robin.  This is organized through the
Great Lakes Forestry Centre in Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario. LABEX (Laboratories Exchange Program)
is coordinated by the  International Soil Reference  and Information Centre, Wageningen, the
Netherlands.  A foliage sample  exchange  has  also been organized  in the  past  by IUFRO
(International Union of Forestry Research Organizations), and is also based in Wageningen, the
Netherlands.

Method Detection Limits

     The method detection limit is usually defined as the smallest amount of analyte  which may
be measured under routine operating conditions.  It is the minimum amount that can be reliably
discerned as being different  from the blank level.   There is some degree of  imprecision  in
measurements at all  analyte concentrations  and the  percent contribution of that imprecision is
generally greater at low levels.  Considering this, the reported detection limit must take into account
this  imprecision and should not be reported merely as the lowest readable value above the blank
on a particular day. The instrument detection limit may be determined from the standard deviation
of the blank value calculated from a large number of runs. The method detection limit, however, may
be calculated from the mean standard deviation of either a low level standard or preferably replicate
samples at close to blank levels. Generally, three times the standard deviation of the blank or low

-------
                                                              GLP
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Rage:
1.1
May 22, 1995
13 of 14
level standard is quoted as the instrument detection limit. A minimum number of replicates required
for the determination of detection limits should be seven.
                                                              i

Blind Audit Samples

     To avoid special care being given to quality control samples and samples which form part of
an inter-laboratory comparison,  it  is often valuable to arrange  for blind audit samples to be
submitted to  the laboratory.  These samples may be submitted by the client, laboratory manager,
or external organization.  They should be  received through the normal channels and should be
unrecognizable from real samples.  This allows a better measure of the performance of a method
under routine operating conditions.                               i
Summary

     Ultimately, the integrity of one's data depends on the quality of the operations within the
laboratory.  For this reason alone, the importance of good laboratory practices cannot be over-
stated.  The above discussion provided only a cursory review of any of the topics. It is advisable
that anyone embarking on terrestrial  monitoring  work adequately address the area  of good
laboratory practices before proceeding.  The very nature of long-term environmental monitoring may
mean changes in laboratories and/or laboratory staff over the course of the monitoring period.
Many researchers have found their data sets incomparable or have found uncertainties in historical
data. Frequently, these problems result from improper documentation of laboratory procedures,
quality assurance and control, and measures of accuracy and precision.  Addressing these areas
at the outset of a monitoring study will help avoid future disappointment.
References
Kalra, Y.P., and D.G. Maynard. 1991. Methods manual for forest soil and plant analysis. Information
     Report NOR-X-319. Forestry Canada, Northwest .Region, Northern Forestry Centre, Edmonton,
     Alta.

Maynard,  D.G., Y.P. Kalra, and F.G. Radford. 1987. Extraction and determination of sulfur in organic
     horizons of forest soils. Soil Sci. Soc. of Am. J. 51:801-806.

Neary, A.J., and S.R. Barnes. 1993. The effect of sample grinding on extractable iron and aluminum
     in soil. Can. J. Soil Sci. 73:73-80.

Ontario Ministry of the Environment. 1986. Quality assurance policy and guidelines. Laboratory
     Services Branch, Rexdale, Ontario.                         :

-------
                                                              GLP
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
14 of 14
Peverill, K.I., G.P. Briner, and LA Douglas. 1975. Changes in extractable sulphur and potassium
     levels in soils due to oven drying and storage. Aust. J. Soil Res. 13:69-75.

Robarge, W.P., and I. Fernandez. 1986. Quality assurance methods manual for laboratory analytical
     techniques. Prepared for the U.S.  EPA and USD A Forest Response Program. Corvallis
     Environmental Research Laboratory,  Corvallis, OR.

-------
PLANT TISSUE ANALYSIS

-------

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
             3
             2.1
             May 22. 1995
             1 of 6
 Introduction
                          Total Nitrogen in Plant Tissue
            f     °"f   -th6- flve major constituents of  living matter.   As such, its form and
            ?    * °f maj°r  in?erest When dealin9  with  the  9rowth of terrestrial and aquatic
            h  na T' n'tr°9en's !ound in a number of forms, all of which are interconvertible given
            .hoT'Ca  a.nd ™c/°biolog.cal conditions. Soil N accounts for only a small fraction of N
                   SSth'V^1^1 °n'y **?* Sma" Pr°P°rti0in is directly available to plants
 nn       ,    MU °i0*f the N '.8 in,the organic form-  Plants obtaiiri most of their N from inorganic
 ions, NO3  and NH/( that comprise less than 1% of the total N.

 ««i-  AtmosPhffc deposition of NOX can directly affect the total foliar N concentrations. Further
 foliar N content changes may be brought about by indirect effects to the forest ecosystem, such
 as a result of acid deposition. Therefore, the measurement of total N in plants is suggested for
 long-term terrestrial monitoring programs, such as LRTAP.


 Review of Methods
          /n '" P'ant tiS8Jie is usually measured by either a wet oxidation (Kjeldahl method) or dry
          (Dumas method) procedure (Bremner and Mulvaney, 1982).  Considerable modifications
 have been proposed for these methods (e.g., Nelson and Sommeirs, 1980).  More recently near
 infrared reflectance spectroscopy (NIRS) and LECO combustion have been used as alternatives to
  *  ?°?™ £f ' chemical analysis for total N determination in foliage (Tsay et al., 1982; Wessman
 et al., 1988). These are not in widespread use, however, and they involve expensive equipment  For
 these reasons, chemical wet oxidation techniques are most frequently used.

      The principle of the Kjeldahl and Dumas techniques have been 'thoroughly discussed in several
 reviews (Bremner,  1965; Nelson and Sommers, 1980; Bremner and MulvaTiey, 1982). The Dumas
 22 *    *° not q"ant|tatively recover many nitrogenous compounds (e.g., heterocyclic compounds)
 ffS™L!U£2S  ?K ai?3KZ!!; based on tne Dumas method has not been widely used (Bremner and
 Mu vaney, 1982).  The Kjeldahl procedure is more commonly used and modifications of the original
 Kjeldahl methods have extended the scope of the procedure.  The total Kjeldahl N method involves
 the digestion of the sample with H2SO4 to convert organic N to NH/-N followed by distillation of the
  IRS  ^   strong alkali to liberate NH3. Various modifications to the distillation and measurement
 °J liS l!beraled^1?1na,v!,.been Proposed. In addition, various  methods for the direct measurement
 of NH4  in the Kjeldahl digests have also  been used.  Highly refractory organic N compounds or
 compounds containing N-N or N-O linkages are not completely recovered by the Kjeldahl digestion
 (Bremner and Mulvaney, 1982).    "
Reference Method

     The reference method uses the Kjeldahl acid digestion in the
converts organic nitrogen to inorganic ammonium. The measurement
                                             .
distillation to liberate NH3 which is measured by acid titration. The
on a hot plate or in an aluminum digestion block.
presence of a catalyst which
nt of N is done using alkaline
digestion is carried out either

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
3
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 6
Summary of Method

     Vegetation samples are digested by the regular Kjeldahl technique using  a  K,,SO4-CuSO4
catalyst in an aluminum block digestor with internal heaters and temperature control Determination
of NH/-N is done by an automated system  (Tecator Kjeltec 1030) determining NH3 liberated by
distillation of  the digest with 40% NaOH. The NH3 is absorbed in unstandardized H3BO3 and
ammonium borate is formed.  The borate is titrated back to H3BO3 using a standard strong acid
(HCI).

Interferences

     After digestion, samples must not be allowed to cool in the digestion block as NH3 will be lost
from the  (NHJ2SO4 formed by the digestion.

Safety

     Protective clothing and safety glasses  should be worn when handling strong acids.  The
diqestion blocks should be located in the fume hood and, if possible, the temperature controMer
should be located outside the fume  hood.  The equipment should not  be left unattended.  The
preparation of the NaOH should also be done in the fume hood. The NaOH pellets should be added
very slowly to the water and in  very small portions due  to the intense exothermic reaction that
occurs.


Apparatus and Equipment

      • digestion block, 20 place, Tecator System 20 1050 or equivalent,  with programmable
       temperature controller.

      • distillation and  titration apparatus, Kjeltec Auto 1030 Analyzer or equivalent.

      • glass digestion tubes (295 mm x 40 mm), 250 mL to fit block, appropriate to sample and
       solution volume used.

      • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.


 Reagents and Consumable Materials

      • sulphuric acid,  H2SO4, concentrated, reagent grade (96%).

      • water~DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
        I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

      • catalyst, Kjeltab tablets  or equivalent. Each tablet contains 3.5 g Kj,SO4 and 0.4 g GuS04.

      • hydrochloric acid, HCI, standard acid 0.01 M.

      • boric acid, H3BO3, reagent grade powder.

      • ammonium chloride, NH4CI, reagent grade powder.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
3
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 6
      • methanol, reagent grade.                               !
      • sodium hydroxide, NaOH, reagent grade pellets.
      • sodium hydroxide solution, 40%-Dissolve 10 kg of NaOH in 15 I. DI water.
      • bromocresol green.
      • bromocresol green solution-In a 100 mL volumetric flask dissolve 0.100 g bromocresol green
       in methanol.  Dilute to volume with methanol.
      • methyl red.
      • methyl red solution-In a 100 mL volumetric flask dissolve 0.100 g methyl red in methanol.
       Dilute to volume with methanol.                         j
      • receiving solution (Tecator, 1985)-Dissolve 100 g H3BO, in DI water and dilute to 10 L Add
       100 mL bromocresol green solution.  Add 70 mL methyl red solution.  Add 5 mL of 40%
       NaOH solution.
      • recovery check solution, 5,000 mg-N/L--In a one litre volumetric flask dissolve 19.0927 g
  ,     NH4CI in DI water.  Dilute to  volume.

 Calibration and Standardization
      Before analyzing the digested  samples, distilled water blanks are run on  the Kjeltec 1030
Analyzer until a constant reading of  HCI is obtained. A 5 mL aliquot of a recovery check solution
containing 5,000 mg-N/L is analyzed  to check the recovery.  Recovery should be within ± 10%.
Procedure                                                \
Step 1 -   Weigh 0.250 g of plant material (20 mesh) into a digestion tube.
Step 2 -   Add 10 mL concentrated H2SO4 to the tube and mix by swirling.
          Note:  This step should be carried out in a fume hood.  \
                                                             \
Step 3 -   Heat tubes at 200° C in the digestion block until very black (appro* 30 minutes).
Step 4 -   Add one catalyst tablet (Kjeltab).
Step 5 -   Heat tubes at 200° C for  15-20 minutes until the Kjeltab dissolves.
Step 6 -   Increase the block temperature to 300° C and heat for 30 minutes.
Step 7 -   Raise the temperature to 425° C and heat tubes until the sample turns a turquoise
          green. Digest samples for 20 minutes.                \

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
3
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 6
Step 8 -   Remove the digestion tubes from the block and allow to cool for about 5 minutes.

          Note:  Do not allow to cool in the heating block as NH3 from the (NI-Q2S04 formed by
          digestion will be lost if heated.

Step 9 -   Add approximately 30 ml_ DI water and mix well until sample is in solution.

Step 10 -  Dilute to approximately 100 mL with DI water.

Step 11 -  Follow instructions for the operation of the Kjeltec Auto 1030 Analyzer fTecator, 1985).

Step 12 -  Set the alkali pump to deliver 25-30 mL of 40%'NaOH.

Step 13 -  Titrate the sample with 0.01 M HCI.
Quality Control

Precision

     One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To eliminate bias
due to position in the run, the routine  sample duplicate should be analyzed separately within the
analytical run.   Within-run precision  is determined from duplicates based  on relative  percent
difference between the samples at an  acceptance limit of a RPD •£ 10%.

Accuracy

     Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the accuracy
windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.  It is recommended
that two or more accuracy standards  be prepared with each batch of samples.  These provide a
check on total between-run precision (digestion and distillation/titration).

Method Blanks

     Three method blanks, carried through the extraction procedure, are analyzed with each batch
of samples to measure potential contamination.  Method blanks should be run at the beginning,
middle, and end of  each analytical run.  The concentration of each  blank should be  less than or
equal to the instrument detection limit.

Quality Control Preparation Sample

     A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision.
Accuracy of the  QCPS should be within ± 10% of the long-term mean.  Between-run precision can
be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term  standard deviation.
If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard
deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
                                                3
                                                2.1
                                                May 22, 1995
                                                5 of 6
 Quality Control Check Standard                        \

      A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning/after every ten
 samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. The QCCS should contain all the analytes
 of interest with mid-calibration range concentrations.  Quantified values of the QCCS should be
 within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

      It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
 so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems  If
 analyzed values deviate from the long-term mean by  more than three standard  deviations  the
 instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

 Suggested Run Format

 QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
 QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
 QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
 QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.
       where:  QCCS
               MB
               QCPS
               DUP
               SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
 Calculations and Reporting
formula:
       Report total N as percentage on a dry-weight basis to the nearest 0.01% using the following
                        N% = (ml sample - mL blank) x N x 1.401
                                     weight (g) of dry soil
       where: N = normality of HCI titrant solution.


References

American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.01,
     Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapprovsd 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia,
     Pennsylvania.                                           ;

Bremner, J.M. 1965. Organic nitrogen in soil. Jn Bartholomew W.V., and F.iE. Clark (ed.) Soil nitrogen
     Agronomy 10. Am. Soc. Agron., Madison, WI. p. 93-149.

Bremner, J.M., and C.S. Mulvaney. 1982. Nitrogen-total. In Page, LA. et al. (ed.) Methods of soil
     analysis. Agronomy 9. Am. Soc. Agron., Madison WI. p. 595-624.

Nelson, D.W., and L.E. Sommers. 1980. Total nitrogen analysis for soiil and plant tissues. J. Assoc.
     Off. Anal. Chem. 63:770-780.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               F'age:
3
2.1
May 22. 1995
6 of 6
Tecator. 1985. Kjeltec Auto 1030 Analyzer Manual. Tecator, AB. Hoganas, Sweden. 43p.

Tsay, M.L, D.H. Gjerstad, and G.R. Glover. 1982. Tree leaf reflectance: a promising technique to
     rapidly determine nitrogen and chlorophyll content.  Can. J. For. Res. 12:788-792.

Wessman, C.A., J.D. Acer, D.L Peterson, and J.M. Melillo. 1988. Foliar analysis using near infrared
     reflectance spectroscopy. Can. J. For.  Res. 18:6-11.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
4
2.1
May 22, 1995
1 of 7
                          Total Sulphur in Plant Tissue
Introduction
     Sulphur is an essential element for all biological systems.  Historically, its importance as a
plant nutrient and reports of widespread deficiencies, especially in sub-humid areas of intensive
leaching has made it a routine measurement in some laboratories. Most of the sulphur in surface
soils occurs in combination with organic matter (Freney and Williams, 1983). Sulphate is the most
oxidized form of S and most easily taken up by plants and microorganisms (Blair, 1971).  Sulphate
(SO*2")  is taken up by plants, reduced to S  and used to form S-containcng amino acids and other
reduced-S compounds (Stewart et al., 1983).  Most plants contain approximately as much S  as
phosphorus.                                                               '

     Concern over the long-range transport and deposition of SO*2" in precipitation has lead to
increased monitoring of the S status of soils.  The effects of SO/*" adsorption and desorption  on
soil cation leaching has also been the subject of much research.  Fundamental to studying the
effects of strong acid precipitation on terrestrial and aquatic systems is an understanding  of the
behaviour of S in plant and soil systems. The measurement of total S in plant tissue is, therefore,
suggested for terrestrial monitoring programs, such as LRTAP.
Review of Methods

      It has only been within the last 15 years that the difficulty of accurately measuring S in soils
and vegetation has been overcome.  Recent advances in analytical techniques have resulted in the
accurate and  precise measurement of S in various types of soil and plant materials (Dick and
Tabatabai, 1979; Hogan and Maynard, 1984; Nieto and Frankenberger, Jr., 1985; Maynard et al., 1987).
Several methods are routinely used for the determination of S in environmental samples. These may
be divided into two groups, namely, those involving wet oxidization of the sample and those which
involve direct sample analysis (Hogan  and Maynard, 1984).              ~

      Methods available for the wet oxidation of organic materials are well documented (Beaton et
al., 1968; Tabatabai, 1982; Blanchar, 1986).  Acid and alkaline oxidation are the most common
(Blanchar et al., 1965; Tabatabai and Bremner, 1970), as they are dependable, accurate and relatively
rapid (Blanchar, 1986). Full recovery from an acid digestion usually requires the use of perchloric
acid.  The danger associated with its use and the special facilities required have meant that, until
recently, acid digestions have been avoided. The recent adaptation of microwave ovens for use in
the laboratory has led to  the development of microwave acid oxidation digestion techniques for
foliage  which  successfully use hydrogen peroxide in place of  perchloric acid.  Many analysts still,
however, prefer the safer,  more rapid,  dry combustion techniques.

      The wet oxidation technique converts S to SO*2"  and  produces a solution which can be
analyzed by a variety of methods.  Turbidimetry is insensitive, lacks precision and is subject to
numerous interferences (Beaton et al., 1968).  Colourimetric methods such as the methylene blue
technique (Technicon, 1972) also have limited application in soils and plant analysis because of
interferences by major nutrient cations (Maynard et al.,  1987).  The colourimetric method developed
by Johnson and Nishita (1952) was found to be the most sensitive and accurate of the colourimetric
procedures.

      Recent publications  (Hogan and  Maynard, 1984; White and Douthit, 1985; Novozamsky et al.,
1986) have shown that the  accurate and precise measurement of S is possible by inductively coupled
plasma-atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES) in a range of environmental samples. Precision

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
4
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 7
is estimated at ± 2%.  Results of analysis of NIST plant material and sediments demonstrated that
the precision and accuracy obtained by ICP-AES are equal to or better than any other technique
currently used. The ICP-AES has several advantages over other methods. It is rapid, flexible, has
a dynamic range, is free from interferences and permits simultaneous multielement analysis. These
factors make it a preferred method of analysis for laboratories possessing ICP-AES capabilities.

      Busman et al. (1983) successfully determined total S in plant material using a combination of
ion chromatography following combustion of the foliage in an oxygen flask.

      Direct analysis  of  the sample  may be  done by combustion of  the sample at elevated
temperatures  (generally at 1000° C  or higher) and measuring the liberated SO, by an infrared
detector.  Examples of instruments that combust the sample include the LECO combustion furnace,
Carla-Erba combustion furnace, or the Fisher S analyzer. These methods require little or no sample
preparation for the determination of total S.

      Additionally, X-ray fluorescence may be used to quantify S in  plant  tissues along with many
other elements. This method  has  been used for  the measurement S in a wide variety of plant
materials including lichens (Tomassini et al., 1976).  Preparation of vegetation samples for analysis
is done by pressing the dried, ground foliage into a pellet using a wax filler. The method is rapid
but requires between one and  two grams of dried sample.  This  may limit the analysis of low
volume samples. Further, the expense of the instrumentation may make this technique an unfeasible
option for many laboratories.

      The LECO S analyzer was originally developed for the determination of S in steel, but because
of its simplicity, speed, and convenience, it has been adapted for  use in soil and plant analysis
(Tabatabai, 1982).  An initial evaluation of this method  by Tabatabai and Bremner (1970) showed
total S results to be unsatisfactory for research that required accurate and precise determinations.
More recent studies have shown that the LECO analyzer equipped  with an infrared detector was
capable of providing rapid, accurate analysis of total S in plant material (Hern, 1984; Jackson et al.,
1985). Work at the Ontario Ministry of the Environment has found that the infrared detection system
on the LECO gave unacceptable results for vegetation and organic soil samples. The LECO analyzer
with iodometric titration for the measurement of S was found to give better recovery and precision.
A Fisher S analyzer, using a similar theory as the LECO, was also found to provide rapid, accurate
analysis of total S in plant material (Guthrie and Lowe,  1984).
Reference Method

     The reference method for total S in soil samples is dry combustion in a LECO sulphur analyzer
with infrared detection.  The analysis of S by LECO-S analyzer has been chosen as a reference
method because it  is widely used in North America  and has been used successfully by some
laboratories for both soil and foliage samples.

Summary of Method

     An air-dried and finely ground sample of soil or a pre-ashed vegetation sample is heated with
an accelerator to 1600 °C in a stream of oxygen.  The released sulphur is converted to sulphur
dioxide and is detected by infrared detector (Hern, 1984).

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date::
                                                             Page:
4
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 7
Interferences and Shortcomings

     Large amounts  of carbon  can prevent proper ignition of  the  sample.   With incomplete
combustion a poor recovery of S may be obtained. This may be overcome by reducing the sample
size and adding LECO Iron Chip Accelerator plus tin. Preashing foliage and highly organic soils at
475 to 500° C for two  hours is usually done, but preliminary studies should be done on the type of
samples to be analyzed to determine whether a loss of S occurs during this ashing.  Preashed
samples also require accelerator to overcome interference from residual carbon.
                                                              j
     Moisture deposits on the walls of the delivery tubes or the surface of the dust filter will absorb
SOj. This may be overcome by using magnesium perchlorate between the dust filter and the original
drying tube.

     Chlorine in concentrations of less than 1%  does not interfere.  II1 titration is used to detect S,
the halogens, iodine, chlorine and fluorine may  darken the solution iin the titration vessel by the
formation of interhalogen compounds.  Poor recoveries may result. A trap inserted in the delivery
tube and filled with 20 mesh antimony metal will prevent these interferences.

     Interferences from nitrogen may be overcome by increasing the  oxygen flow rate to 1.5
litres/minute.

Safety

     Normal safety precautions should be taken when using high-frequency combustion furnaces.

     Protective clothing and safety glasses should be worn when handling reagents. Heat resistant
gloves  may be needed when placing samples in the furnace.  The furnace  must be adequately
vented  and protected  from human contact and  combustible materials. Gas cylinders  should be
bolted or chained in an upright position.

     Fumes of magnesium oxide are toxic. Magnesium perchlorate is a fire and explosion hazard
if it comes in contact with organic materials.


Apparatus  and Equipment

     • sulphur analyzer with infrared detector, LECO model SC-132. or equivalent.

     « balance, accurate to 0.001 g.

     • muffle oven, capable of maintaining 500  ± 5° C.

     « desiccator and desiccant, P2O5.

     • LECO scoop.

     • LECO crucibles and covers.

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
4
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 7
Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • oxygen, high purity.

     • compressed air, if needed.

     • anhydrous magnesium perchlorate (Mg(C\OJz, 10-20 mesh, or equivalent desiccant specified
       by manufacturer for drying gases after combustion and prior to detection.

     • magnesium oxide, MgO, reagent grade powder, low in sulphur.

     • accelerators, vanadium pentoxide, iron chips, and/or copper metal


Calibration and Standardization

     Set up the instrument according to the LEGO operating manual. In general, the instrument
should be calibrated at least once a day or once per batch of samples, whichever is more frequent.
Use either NIST (formerly NBS) reference materials or standards supplied by the manufacturer and
approved by the laboratory or QA manager.  The concentration range of the standards must be
representative of the C concentrations expected in the soil samples.  A minimum of a two-point
calibration curve should be used. Use of a NIST standard reference material as an initial calibration
check is highly recommended.

     Some suggested calibration standards and reference samples include:  LEGO brand iron
powder (0.036% S), LEGO coal calibration standard (2.56% S), NIST (NBS) coal reference material
(1.89% S), SU-1A nickel-copper-cobalt ore (9.35% S), and CCU-1 reference material (35.4% S).

     Ensure that the anhydrone is dry and the dust filter is clean. Prior to analyzing samples, the
instrument is conditioned  by running low level calibration standards until the results are stabilized
to within 5%. Once stable, three blank crucibles (accelerator only) are analyzed followed by three
standards.
Procedure.

Step 1 -   Weigh out approximately 3 g of sample into a ceramic crucible. Record sample weight.

Step 2 -   Ash sample at 500 °C for 2 hours in the muffle oven. Cool sample in desiccator. Re-
          weigh cooled sample and record weight of ashed sample.

Step 3 -   Preset power settings on induction furnace according to the manual.

Step 4 -   Ignite sample in the crucible for the suggested time period (either given in the operating
          manual or as determined through method development work for the particular sample
          type being analyzed).

Step 5 -   Take  sulphur measurement reading.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Pago:
                                                4
                                                2.1
                                                May 22, 1995
                                                5 of 7
Quality Control

Precision

     One sample from each batch should be analyzed  in duplicate.  Within-run precision is
determined from duplicates based on relative percent difference (RPD) between the samples with
an acceptance limit of a RPD £ 10%.

Accuracy                                                  i

     Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the accuracy
windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

Method Blanks                                           \

     Two blank crucibles (accelerator only) are analyzed before the run and one blank crucible is
also analyzed in the middle and at the end of each analytical run. The concentration of each blank
should be less than or equal to the instrument detection limit. All results should be blank corrected
using the mean of the acceptable method blank readings.

Quality Control Preparation Sample

     A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision.
Accuracy of the QCPS should be within ± 10% of the long-term  mean.  EJetween-run precision can
be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard deviation.
If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard
deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all  digestion and quantification steps.

Suggested Run Format

MB, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
Samples 26 to 30, MB.
       where:  MB
               QCPS
               DUP
               SRM
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
Calculations and Reporting

       Infra-red system: % S is read directly from the instrument. The sample weight, as. different
from the standard, is taken into account on some instruments.

       Results are reported to two significant figures.  Results are  read to the nearest 0.001%.
Results should be blank corrected.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
4
2.1
May 22, 1995
6 of 7
References

Beaton, J.D., G.R. Burns and J. Platou. 1968. Determination of sulphur in soils and plant material.
     Technical Bull. No. 14, The Sulphur Institute, Washington, D.C.

Blair, G.J. 1971. The sulphur cycle. J. Aust. Inst. Agr. Sci. 37:113-121.
Blanchar, R.W. 1986. Measurement of sulfur in soils and plants. ID MA Tabatabai (ed.). Sulfur in
     agriculture. Amer. Soc. Agronomy. Madison, WI. Agronomy 27:457:490.

Blanchar, R.W., G. Rehm, and AC. Caldwell. 1965. Sulfur in plant materials by digestion with nitric
     and perchloric acid. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 29:71-72.

Busman, L.M., R.P. Dick, and MA Tabatabai. 1983.  Determination of total sulfur and
     chlorine in plant materials by ion chromatography. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 47:1167-1170.

Dick, WA and MA Tabatabai. 1979. Ion chromatographic determination of sulfate and nitrate in
     soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:847:852.

Freney, J.R. and C.H. Williams. 1983. The sulphur cycle in soil. p. 139-201 In M.B. Ivanov and J.R.
     Freney (eds.). The global biogeochemical sulphur cycle. SCOPE Rep. no. 19. John Wiley and
     Sons, New York, NY.

Guthrie, T.F., and LE. Lowe. 1984. A comparison of methods for total sulphur analysis of tree
     foliage. Can. J. For. Res. 14:470-473.

Hern, J.L 1984. Determination of total sulphur in plant  materials using an automated sulphur
     analyzer. Comm. Soil Sci. Plant Anal. 15:99-107.

Hogan, G.D. and Maynard, D.G. 1984. Sulphur analysis of environmental materials by vacuum
     inductively coupled plasma atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES). p.  676-683 Ip Proc.
     Sulphur-84, Int. Conf., Calgary, Alberta. June 1984. The Sulphur Development Institute of
     Canada, Calgary.

Jackson, LL, E.E. Engleman, and J.L Peard. 1985. Determination of total sulfur in lichens and plants
     by combustion-infrared analysis. Environ. Sci. Technol. 19:437-441.

Johnson, C.M. and H. Nishita. 1952. Microestimation of sulphur in plant materials, soils and irrigation
     waters. Anal. Chem. 24:736-742.

Maynard, D.G., Y.P. Kalra, and F.G. Radford. 1987. Extraction and determination of sulfur in organic
     horizons of forest soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. £1:801-806.

Nieto, K.F. and W.T. Frankenberger, Jr. 1985. Single column ion chromatography:  I. Analysis of
     inorganic anions in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 49:587-592.

Novozamsky, I., R. van Eck, J.J. van der Lee, V.J.G. Hauba and E. Temminghoff. 1986. Determination
     of total sulphur and extractable sulphate in  plant materials by inductively-coupled plasma
     atomic emission spectrometry. Comm. Soil Sci. Plant Anal. 17:1147-1157.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
4
2.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 7
Stewart, J.W.B., C.V. Cole, and D.G. Maynard. .1983. Interactions of biogeochemical cycles in
     grassland ecosystems. In B. Bolin and R.B. Cook (eds.). The major biogeochemical cycles and
     their interactions. SCOPE Ftep. No. 21. John Wiley and Sons, New York, NY.

Tabatabai, M.A. 1982. Sulfur. ID A.L Page, R.H. Miller, and D.R. Keeney (eds.). Methods of soil
     analysis. Part 2. 2nd ed. Agronomy 9:501-538.

Tabatabai, MA and J.M. Bremner.  1970. Comparison of some methods for determination of total
     sulfur in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 34:417-420.

Technicon. 1972. Sulfate in water and wastewater. Industrial method no. 118-71W. Technicon
     Industrial Systems, Tarrytown, NY.

Tomassini, F.D., K.J. Puckett, E. Nieboer, D.H.S. Richardson, and B. Grace. 1976. Determination of
     copper, iron, nickel and sulphur by X-ray fluorescence in lichens from the MacKenzie Valley,
     Northwest Territories, and the Sudbury District, Ontario. Can. J. Bot. 54:1591-1603.

White, Jr., R.T. and G.E. Douthit. 1985. Use of microwave  oven and nitric acid-hydrogen peroxide
     digestion  to prepare botanical materials for elemental analysis by inductively coupled argon
     plasma emission spectroscopy. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 68:766-769.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
5
2.1
May 22, 1995
1 of 7
                P,  Mn, Fe, Al, Ca,  Mg, and K in Plant Tissue

Introduction

Phosphorus

     Phosphorus is  a naturally occurring  element essential to plant growth and microorganism
activity  In acid soils, phosphorus is found primarily in combination with iron and aluminum oxides
and oxyhydroxides whereas in alkaline soils, calcium phosphates predominate.  Plant available
phosphorus occurs^almost exclusively as orthophosphate in the soil solution.

     Phosphorus levels in the environment are increased  significantly by man's  activities.  Acid
deposition may  impact on soil and affect the availability of phosphorus  to  plants.  Therefore,
measuring phosphorus levels in  plants  may provide  information on  phosphorus availability.
Increased soil acidity may produce increased aluminum availability.  In turn, aluminum toxicity is
often manifested in the plant as a phosphorus deficiency.

Manganese

     Manganese is  essential in plant  nutrition and  controls  the behavior of several other
mtoronutrients.  Apparently,  the most important function of manganese is related to the plant's
oxidation-reduction processes. Manganese appears to participate in the oxygen-evolving system of
photosynthesis  and  also plays a basic role in  the photosynthetic electron transport system.
Chtoroplasts are the  most sensitive of all cell components to manganese deficiencies and react by
showing structural impairment.

     Tissue testing  is important in determining the plant manganese content since soil analyses
alone are not very reliable in diagnosing the manganese supply to plants.  Excesses of manganese
can have a toxic effect on plants  which is interrelated with other elements, particularly iron.

     The manganese content of plants depends on plant characteristics and the pool of available
manganese in the soil. Generally, the most readily available forms of manganese are found in a
waterlogged acid soil. Manganese toxicity in some field crops might be expected on acid soils with
pH values of 5.5 or toss and high manganese levels.  Acid deposition can, therefore, increase
manganese availability.

Iron

      Iron is considered the key metal in energy transformations needed for syntheses and other
life processes of cells. Iron deficiencies affect several physiological processes and, therefore, can
retard plant growth.  On soils rich in soluble iron, excessive iron uptake by plants can produce toxic
effects.  Plant injury due to iron toxicity is most likely to occur in strongly acid soils, acid sulphate
soils, and flooded soils.

      Acid soils  tend to be higher in soluble inorganic iron forms  than either neutral or calcareous
soils. The concentration of iron in soil solutions within common soil pH levels generally ranges from
30 to 550 ug/L, whereas, in very acid soils, it can exceed 2000 fig/L In acid anaerobic soils, Fe may
be toxic to plants whereas in alkalinei  well-aerated soils, low concentrations of soluble iron species
may lead to iron deficiencies in the plant.  Almost all cases of iron toxjcity and deficiency in plants
are considered to be the result of the soil factors governing iron solubility. These properties, in turn,
are affected by  acid deposition which can alter soil pH and, thus, iron availability to the plant.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
5
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 7
Aluminum

      Aluminum is a common constituent of all plants although the content varies greatly depending
on soil and plant characteristics.  There is some evidence that low levels of aluminum can have a
beneficial effect on plant growth by controlling colloidal properties in the cell.  Aluminum injury or
toxicity is often reported for plants grown in acid soils. In soils with pH values below 5.5, aluminum
mobility increases sharply.  The mobile aluminum very actively competes  with other cations for
exchange sites resulting in impaired nutrient uptake and transport in the plant.

      Aluminum toxicity is also frequently associated with increased levels of iron, manganese, and
other heavy metals which are readily available in acid soils. Aluminum excess in plants is known
to reduce internal calcium transport and even induce a calcium deficiency in the plant.

Calcium

      Calcium is an essential element for all life forms and enhances biological productivity in plants.
Calcium imparts rigidity to the cell wall and is necessary to growth.  It is  generally absorbed by
roots by ionic exchange and is thought to affect absorption of other cations and anions. Calcium
is essential for maintenance of selective ion transport in cellular membranes and minimizes root
injury resulting  from sodium  and hydrogen ions.   A deficiency of  calcium  results in the
disorganization of  cellular membrane structure.

      In most plants the calcium ion is generally immobile and usually does not move out of older,
lower leaves to younger, upper leaves. Therefore, symptoms of deficiency show at extremities of
the plant in regions of new growth. Calcium uptake and availability depends on the pH of the soil.

Magnesium

      Each chlorophyll molecule contains one atom of magnesium, that is, 2.7% of the weight of the
molecule.   Magnesium is an activator for many enzymes.  The magnesium ton may exist in high
concentrations  as magnesium  sulphate or chloride  since these  molecules are highly soluble.
Magnesium can occur in toxic concentrations if soils are low in calcium but this condition is rare.

      In contrast to calcium, magnesium is mobile within the plant. ![f deficient, magnesium moves
from older to younger leaves. Therefore, visual symptoms are exhibited by the older leaves having
interveinal yellowing or chlorosis. Magnesium availability decreases in the soil from a pH of 6.5
down to approximately 4.5.
Potassium

     Potassium is one of the three most essential nutrients for plants along with nitrogen and
phosphorus.  The potassium ion is highly mobile within the plant. Potassium, like magnesium, is
required for the proper functioning of plant enzymes.  The presence of potassium in the plant has
also been found to aid in the uptake of other nutrients, namely, anions such as NO,", and in their
movement within the plant.
                                                              i
     A potassium deficiency can occur in a variety of soils and may be unavailable to plants even
when present in the soil. The most characteristic symptom of deficiency is that of tip and marginal
scorch of the most recently matured leaves.  Potassium deficiency has sometimes been associated
with an accumulation of molybdenum in the plant leaves. Potassium availability decreases from pH
6.0 to 4.5.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
5
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 7
Review of Methods

     The two most common decomposition procedures are wet oxidation and dry ashing. Wet
oxidation is the destruction of organic matter by high temperature acid digestion.  Common acids
used include sulphuric, nitric, hydrochloric, and perchloric acids usually in some combination of two
or three.  Sulphuric  acid  is not recommended for  use when  digesting tissue high in calcium.
Relatively insoluble calcium sulphate may form and possibly reduce concentrations of other elements
by coprecipitation. Perchloric acid, when hot, is a reactive oxidant and can react with explosive force
when brought into contact with highly oxidizable compounds. Therefore, extreme care is required
when using this acid. Perchloric acid is often used with nitric  acid to speed up the digestion
reaction.  Further, a  combination of perchloric, nitric, and sulphuric acids can be used.  Various
procedures with this combination of  three acids have been developed with the most effective
combination being a 1:1:3 perchloric:sulphuric:nitric acid mixture. Exact  temperature  control is
required to avoid the danger of explosion. Temperature control can be maintained through the use
of temperature-controlled  digestion  blocks.   The  AOAC Official  Methods  of Analysis (1984)
recommends a perchloric-nitric digestion for Ca, Cu, Fe, Mg, Mn, K and Zn determinations in plant
tissues. If quantification is to be performed by inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopy, it
is recommended that the perchloric acid be present in minimal quantities.

      Wet oxidation can also  be carried out under elevated pressures in  a  Parr bomb (Sung et al.,
1984) or in sealed ampules placed into an autoclave at 125° C under pressure (Vigler et al., 1980).
Newer methods exist for rapid microwave oven digestions applying the same digestion principles
as those applied  under elevated pressure conditions.

      A combination of hydrochloric-nitric acid can be used but is not usually strong enough to
completely digest the plant sample.  However, if the sample is first ashed to remove carbon,  the
hydrochloric-nitric mixture can be employed to dissolve the remaining ash. The ashing temperature
is usually kept below 500° C to prevent volatilization losses.  In contrast, the temperature must  not
be too low or incomplete organic matter destruction  will occur.  In some  cases, ashing aids
(catalysts or accelerators) may be used to assist in the sample decomposition.

      Upon completion of the sample preparation,  quantification of the  plant nutrients can be
performed by ICP or AAS (atomic  absorption  spectroscopy).  If  ICP  is selected, a  vacuum
spectrometer is required for sulphur analysis.  ICP has high speed, multielement capacity, and
computer control capabilities.  AAS,  while as sensitive as ICP, is  more time consuming since
analysis is performed one element at a time instead of simultaneously as in the ICP. Further, AAS
cannot be used to analyze for sulphur or phosphorus.


Reference Method

      A dry ashing technique is the reference method due to the difficulties with wet digestions, such
as a toss of calcium with sulphuric acid and the danger of explosion with perchloric acid. This
method is appropriate for all the elements being studied (Al, Fe, Ca, Mg,  P, Mn, and K). The shape
and size of ashing vessel can affect ashing efficiency. A high walled, open vesselis recommended.
Silica, pyrex, or well  glazed porcelain vessels can be used.  Vycor should be used instead of pyrex
if boron analysis is  required.  The muffle furnace temperature must be raised slowly to prevent
flaming of the sample. Highly carbonaceous tissue may require an ashing  aid such as magnesium
nitrate or nitric acid.  The ash, after complete  organic destruction has occurred, should be white and
free of black carbon particles.  The  ash is  combined with  a nitric-hydrochloric acid mixture and

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
5
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 7
heated to dissolve the ash. This will help to ensure release of aluminum and iron.  During the acid
digestion, hydrogen peroxide (H-PJ is added to ensure that manganese oxides are solubilized.

     Final elemental quantification should be performed by ICP-AES using a vacuum spectrometer.

Summary of Method                                     i
                                                            ,!•

     A weighed sample is ashed at 500°  C for three hours.  The ash is heated  in a nitric-
hydrochlorec acid digestate for four hours.  Hydrogen peroxide is added and the volume reduced to
1 mL The solution is made up to volume and analyzed by ICP.

Interferences and Shortcomings                        \  .         .

     Volatilization losses can occur on ashing leading to low results. This can be minimized by
sequential temperature ashing.

     Sequential ICP is less prone to interferences than simultaneous ICP.  Spectral overlap can
occur but  can be compensated for by an interelement correction factors after  monitoring and
measuring the interfering element. Scattered light, emission from  the torch, and several other
factors can produce background  emission  leading to erroneously high results.  ICP has the
capability of measuring the background intensity at a selected distance adjacent to the analytical
line and correcting the reading by background subtraction.

Safety
                                                            i
     Normal laboratory safety practices should be observed. Protective clothing and safety glasses
should be worn especially when handling HCI, HNO3, and H2O2.


Apparatus and Equipment                          \

     • crucibles, porcelain.                                   1

     • watchglasses.                                        i  •
                                                            I
     • polystyrene, centrifuge tubes, 15 mL

     • polyethylene dropping bottles.                          \
                                                            i
     • muffle furnace, capable of  heating to 500° C.

     • hot plate, capable of heating to 100° C, or equivalent.     !

     • top-loading balance capable of weighing to 0.01 g.

     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.

     • inductively coupled  plasma atomic emission vacuum spectrometer with computer and
       auto-sampler.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
5
2.1
May 22, 1995
5 of 7
Reagents and Consumable Materials
     • nitric acid, concentrated (specific gravity 1.41)--Ultrapure grade, Baker Instra-Analyzed or
       equivalent.

     • hydrochloric acid, concentrated (12 M HCI, specific gravity 1.19)-Ultrapure grade, Baker
       Instra-Analyzed or equivalent.

     • hydrogen peroxide, 50%.

     • water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for
       Type I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • stock solutions for:  potassium,  calcium, magnesium, phosphorus, iron, aluminum, and
       manganese.

     • argon, oxygen-free.


Calibration and Standardization

     To correctly calibrate and standardize the ICP, refer to operating manual for the instrument.
Calibrate by analyzing a calibration blank (0 mg/L standard) and a series of at least three additional
standards within the linear range of the instrument.  Calibration standards should be prepared in
the extraction solution.  If an ICP is used,  a multi-element standard may be prepared and analyzed.
The concentration of standards  should bracket the expected sample  concentration; however, the
linear range of the instrument should not  be exceeded.


Procedure

Step 1 -    Weigh 0.50 g of vegetation into a crucible using a top-loading balance.

Step 2 -    In a muffle furnace dry and ash the sample at 150° C for 15 minutes, at 250° C for 60
           minutes and at 500°  C for 3 hours.

Step 3 -    Wet the sample ash  after cooling with DI water.

Step 4-    Add 1 mL of concentrated HNO3 and 3 mL of concentrated HCI.

Step 5 -    Place on a hot plate at 35° C (or low setting) for 10 minutes, then raise temperature to
           just below boiling.

Step 6 -    Cover the crucible with watchglass  and digest for four hours. Remove crucible and
           wash watchglass with DI water adding washings to crucible.

Step 7 -    Add 2 drops HjO2 and return to hot plate at 90-95°  C.

Step 8 -    Reduce volume to 1 mL by evaporation.

Step 9 -    Transfer to 15 mL centrifuge tube washing crucible  with DI water. Dilute to 10 mL

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
5
2.1
May 22, 1995
6 of 7
Step 10 -   Mix sample well.

Step 11 -   Analyze samples by ICP.
 Quality Control                                        I

 Precision

      One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To eliminate bias
 due to position in the run, the routine  sample duplicate should be analyzed separately within the
 analytical run.   Within-run precision is  determined from duplicates based  oa relative  percent
 difference between the samples at ah  acceptance limit of a RPD s 10%.

 Accuracy

      Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
 for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the accuracy
 windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

 Method Blanks

      Three method blanks are taken through the entire digestion procedure to measure potential
 contamination.  Method blanks should  be run at the beginning, middle, and end of each analytical
 run. Blank concentrations should be negligible and less than the instrument detection limit.  Results
 are blank corrected using the mean of  the acceptable method blank; readings.

 Quality Control Preparation Sample                     \    .

      A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
 per analytical run. This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision.
 Accuracy of the QCPS should be within ± 10% of the long-term meam. Between-run precision can
 be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative! long-term standard deviation.
 If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard
deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.

 Quality Control Check Standard                         i
                                                             i
      A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed alt th« beginning, after every ten
samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run.  The QCCS should contain all the analytes
of interest with mid-calibration range concentrations.  Quantified values of the QCCS should be
within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

      It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
so that control charts may be plotted to monitor  laboratory bias and other potential problems.  If
analyzed values  deviate from the long-term mean  by more than three standard deviations, the
instrument is  re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample  analyses.

-------
                                                          Chapter:
                                                          Version:
                                                          Date:
                                                          Page:
                                              5
                                              2.1
                                              May 22,1995
                                              7 of 7
Suggested Run Format

QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.
       where:  QCCS
              MB
              QCPS
              DUP
              SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
Calculations and Reporting

     The calculations for all the metals are as follows:

                     Metal Gug/g) - metal fug/mL) in solution x 10 mL
                                                0.5 g

All sample results are method blank subtracted and should account for any dilution factors.


References

American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards.Vol. 11.01,
     Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia,
     Pennsylvania.

AOAC. 1984. Official Methods of Analysis. Section 3.014.

Sung, J.F.C., A.E. Nevissi. and F.B. Dervalle. 1984. Simple sample digestion of sewage and sludge
     for multi-element analysis. J. Envfr. Sci. Health A19:959-972.

Vigler, M.S., A.W. Vames, and HA Strecker. 1980. Sample preparation techniques for AA and ICP
     spectroscopy. Am. Lab. 12:31-34.

-------
SOIL ANALYSIS

-------

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                       6
                                       2.1
                                       May 22, 1995
                                       1of 20
                               Particle-Size Analysis
Introduction
     Particle-size analysis (PSA) is a measurement of the size distribution of the individual mineral
particles in a soil sample (Gee and Bauder, 1986). Particle-size analysis; provides fundamental data
that can be used for many purposes by many different scientific disciplines. Soil scientists use PSA
data in soil classification, evaluation of field texture, quantification of clay movement in soil horizons,
determination of the relationship of parent material to the solum, chemical adsorption properties,
base exchange capacity, water retention, unsaturated hydraulic conductivity, permeability, aeration,
and soil plasticity.  Engineers  can evaluate tillage  properties,  potential  rates  of  siltation in
waterways,  and determine the suitability of  soil materials for foundations, landfills, roadways,
sewage disposal, etc. using PSA data.  Geologists  and fluvial geomprphologists use PSA in the
evaluation of sedimentation and alluvial properties.

     Particle-size  analysis characterizes particles  with sizes ranging  from boulders  (>60 cm
diameter) to clays (<0.002 mm diameter). A breakdown of the particles by Canadian Soil Survey
Committee (CSSC) and the United States Department of Agriculture (UJ5DA) nomenclatures and the
defined size limits of their mean diameters are as follows (McKeague, 1978):
   CSSC Nomenclature

         clay, fine
       clay, coarse

         silt, fine
       silt, medium
        silt, coarse

      sand, very fine
        sand, fine
      sand, medium
       sand, coarse
     sand, very coarse
          gravel
          cobble
          stone
         boulder
USDA Nomenclature
       clay
        silt
  sand, very fine
     sand, fine
  sand, medium
   sand, coarse
 sand, very coarse
    gravel, fine
  gravel,  coarse

      cobble
       stone
      boulder
Mean diameter size range

   0.0002 mm or less
   0.002 to 0.0002 mm
    0.002 mm or less
   0.005 to 0.002 mm
    0.02 to 0.005 mm
    0.05 to 0.02 mm
    0.05 to 0.002 mm
     0.1 to 0.05 mm
     0.25 to 0.1 mm
     0.5 to 0.25 mm
      1.0 to 0.5 mm
      2.0 to 1.0 mm
     10.0 to 2.0 mm
    76.0 to 10.0 mm
     76.0 to 2.0 mm
    250.0 to 76.0 mm
   600.0 to 250.0 mm
   600.0 mm or greater
In general, particles with mean diameters greater than 2 mm (gravel or larger) are determined in the
field by visual volume estimation and the sand, silt, and clay fractiiohs are determined in the

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
2.1
May 22,
2 of 20
laboratory. More accurate quantification of the gravel and cobble fractions can be obtained through
sieving and weighing of the sample before and after the removal of these individual size fractions.
Since soil scientists are predominantly concerned with the sand, silt and  clay fractions, the
remainder of this discussion focuses on particles less than 2 mm in diameter.
Review of Methods

     Particle-size analysis can be divided into three different phases: (1) sample pretreatment, (2)
sample dispersion, and (3) weight contribution of «ach size fraction to the totart sample weight.
Each phase is comprised of several different processes which are discussed separately.

Sample Pretreatment

     Numerous pretreatments have been developed to achieve complete aggregate dispersion in
samples.  The pretreatments  are primarily for the removal of cementing and binding agents such
as  organic matter,  iron oxides,  carbonates, and soluble  salts.   A  brief discussion of  each
pretreatment follows with a more complete discussion presented in Gee and Bauder (1986).

     The effect of organic matter on sample dispersion varies greatly with different soil types.
Organic matter acts  as a binding agent among particles giving the soil the appearance of having
a coarser texture than if just the mineral components were analyzed. Organic matter is  most
commonly removed using hydrogen peroxide (H2O2). Hydrogen peroxide is added to the soil until
the organic matter is  decomposed as generally indicated by a lack of effervescence from the
sample.  Other oxidants that have been  used include  sodium  hypochlorite  (NaOCI), sodium
hypobromite (NaOBr), and potassium permanganate (KMnO^ (Gee and Bauder,  1986).

      Iron oxides, such as hematite and goethite, can form strong binding agents among soil
particles as either discrete crystals or coatings on particle surfaces (Gee and Bauder, 1986).  Iron
oxide removal usually involves the reduction and  solubilization of iron using Mehra and Jackson's
(1960) sodium dithionite-sodium citrate-sodium bicarbonate (DCB) method. This procedure consists
of multiple washings with the DCB solution until the soil is gray (gleyed), and subsequent washings
with sodium citrate and/or sodium chloride to  remove all iron from  the system,  saturate the
exchange sites with sodium, and flocculate the sample. Iron oxides are an  intricate part of the
mineralogical composition, their  removal can change the particle-size distribution and lead to
erroneous interpretations of other soil chemical properties that  are  commonly related to PSA
contents  (El-Swaify,  1980). The procedure should, therefore, be used with caution.

      Carbonates are commonly removed from the soil by washings with dilute 0.2 N HCI, 1 N HCI,
or an acidified sodium acetate (1  M NaOAc, pH 5).  Sodium acetate is recommended because it is
not as harsh as HCI  and saturates the exchange  sites with sodium. Once again  caution should be
exercised. Limestone and dolomite particles can be removed resulting  in a change in particle-size
distribution and textural classification of the soil  (Kilmer and Alexander, 1949).

-------
                                                              Chapiter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
6
2.1
May 22.1995
3 of 20
      In alkaline  soils, soluble salts  of  calcium, magnesium, and  sodium may be  present in
concentrations high enough to cause particle flocculation.  The addition of sodium-based chemical
dispersants (to be discussed) further hinders aggregate dispersion by increasing the salt content.
Therefore, the salts must be removed prior to sample dispersion. Removal of excess salts can be
accomplished by multiple washings with deionized water. Gee and Bauder (1986) suggest that the
washings should  be continued until the leachate salt concentration drops below 10 mM.

Sample Dispersion                                          \
                                                       • -   '     'l
      Almost all of the analytical methods for the determination of particlei-size distribution require
complete sample dispersion prior to quantifying the individual size fractions.  Without complete
dispersion, PSA results are  biased to the coarser fractions  since various sized aggregates are
measured and not individual soil particles. Sample  dispersion can be performed by mechanical
(including electrical), chemical methods, or a combination of both.

      Common mechanical methods for soil dispersion include: (1) tho use of a "milkshake11 mixer,
(2)  shaking overnight on a reciprocating shaker, or (3) ultrasonic disioersion of the sample. The
"milkshake" mixer and overnight shaking processes rely on shearing action and turbulent mixing of
the sample to disaggregate the soil while the ultrasonic dispersion  separates particles through
cavitatipn (Gee and Bauder, 1986). Particle fragmentation is a concern with these methods due to
their inherently violent nature. Mechanical dispersion techniques are often combined with chemical
dispersing agents to ensure complete sample dispersion.

      Chemical dispersion agents work on the principle of particle repulsion. The addition  of the
dispersing agent  elevates the zeta potential by saturating the exchange sites with a monovalent
cation, such as Na* or NH4+ (Gee and Bauder, 1986). Numerous dispersing chemicals have been
used, including ammonium  hydroxide  (NH4OH), sodium  hydroxide  (NaOH),  sodium  carbonate
(Na2COg),  sodium silicate (Na^SiOJ,  sodium oxalate (Na^OJ, and several sodium phosphate
compounds   such  as   sodium  hexametaphosphate,  sodium  pollyphosphate,  and  sodium
metaphosphate. Certain types of chemical dispersion, however, may cause mineral destruction and
dissolution.                                                      \

Quantification Methods
Sand Fractions                                                 \
                                                                |

     Sands are separated from the silts and clays by wet sieving after sample dispersion. The wet
sands are oven-dried, passed through a nest of separatory sieves, and weighed to determine the
individual sand fraction contents.  The success and simplicity of the sieve method has meant the
development of very few other methods for the measurement of the sand fraction. Six additional
methods to quantify  sand fractions mentioned in the  literature  include the use of the  optical
microscope, computer-assisted image analysis, visual accumulation tube, sedimentation balance,
elutriation, and hydrometer.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
6
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 20
     Optical microscopy allows for direct observation of the sample with sand fraction percentages
determined by grain counting techniques.  Additional information about the sand grains, such as
colour, shape, and surface morphology, is also obtained and can be preserved via photographs.
The major drawbacks of this method are operator fatigue and the extensive time requirements to
perform sufficient grain counts to satisfy counting statistics (Yamate and Stockham, 1979).

     Another method using the grain counting principle is computer-assisted image analysis (Graf,
1979a).   Complete dispersion of the  sample is a key factor in this  analysis since counting is
performed by contrast of the individual grains and against the background.  If the sample is  not
completely dispersed, the computer combines the overlapping grains and count them into a larger
size fraction. Since the system is computer operated, the elimination of operator fatigue is a major
advantage of the method.  This method is still experimental, yet it may have potential for future PSA
application.

     The remaining four methods for measurement of the sand fraction are based on the settling
of grains in  a liquid medium. The rate at which different particles settle is directly related to their
size (radius).  Falling  particles follow Stokes1 law in which the terminal fall velocity of the particle
is defined as follows:
                                     v =
                        where v  = velocity (cm/sec),
                              g  = gravitational acceleration (cm/sec2),
                             q,  = particle density (g/cm3),
                              q,  = liquid density  (g/cm3),
                              d  = particle diameter (cm),  and
                              tl  = liquid viscosity (g/cm" sec).

Stokes' law assumes that the particles are smooth, spherical, and noninteractive with each other,
that terminal velocity is reached immediately at the  start of the  settling process, and that the
viscosity of the liquid controls the  rate of settling.  Separation of the various particle sizes can be
achieved by homogenizatfon of the soil suspension and decanting all that remains above the plane
z = -h (in cm) after a given time / (in sec) as follows (Gee and  Bauder, 1986):

                                             18 T^
 Settling times for silt and clay fractions are provided in Tables 1 and 2.

-------




Table 1. Time
Temperature
(°C)
20.0
20.5
21.0
21.5
22.0
22.5
23.0
23.5
24.0
24.5
25.0
25.5
26.0
26.5
27.0
27.5
28.0
28.5
29.0
29.5
30.0




required for particles to settle to
0.02 mm
hr:min:sec
0:04:48
0:04:34
0:04:31
0:04:28
0:04:25
0:04:22
0:04:19
0:04:15
0:04:13
0:04:10
0:04:07
0:04:04
0:04:01
0:03:59
0:03:56
0:03:53
0:03:51
0:03:48
0:03:46
0:03:43
0:03:41
Chapter:
Version:
Date
Page:
a depth of 10 cm**.
0.005 mm
hr:min:sec
:14:13
:13:19
:12:26 (
:11:34
:10:43
:09:53
1:09:04
1:08:15
1:07:28
1:06:41
1:05:56
1:05:11
1:04:27
1:03:43
1:03:01
1:02:19
1:01:38
1:00:58
1:00:18
0:59:39 !
0:59:01
6
2.1
May 22, 1995
5 of 20

0.002 mm
hrmin
8:00
7:54
7:49
7:43
7:38
7:32
7:27
7:22
7:17
7:12
7:07
7:02
6:57
6:52
6:48
6:44
6:39
6:35
6:31
6:26
6:22
a = assuming q. - 2.65 g/cm3, adjusted for q, and T| for temperature variations.
b = from USDA/SCS, 1992.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
6
2.1
May 22, 1995
6 of 20
Table 2. Sampling depths in cm for the clay fraction (<0.002 mm) for given temperature and settling
        times".                                                 .      .
Temperature
(°C)
20.0
20.5
21.0
21.5
22.0
22.5
23.0
23.5
24.0
24.5
25.0
25.5
26.0
26.5
27.0
27.5
28.0
28.5
29.0
29.5
30.0
4.5
hours
5.82
5.89
5.96
6.04
6.11 .
6.18
6.25
6.33
6.40
6.48
6.55
6.63
6.70
6.78
6.85
6.93
7.01
7.09
7.16
7.24
7.32
a = assuming q. - 2.65 g/cm3, adjusted
b - from USDA/SCS,
1992.
5.0
hours
6.47
6.55
6.63
6.71
6.79
6.87
6.95
7.03
7.11
7.20
7.28
7.36
7.45
7.53
7.62
7.70
7.79
7.87
7.96
8.05
8.13
for q, and i

5.5
hours
7.11
7.20
7.29
7.38
7.47 ,
7.55
7.64
7.73
7.83
7.92
8.01
8,10
8.19
8.28
8.38
8.47
8.57
8.66
8.75
8.85
8.95
1 for temperature

6.0
hours
7.76
7.86
7.95
8.05
8.14
8.24
8.34
8.44
8.54
8.64
8.74
8.84
8.94
9.04
9.14
9.24
9.34
9.45
9.55
9.65
9.76
variations.

6.5
hours
8.41
8.51
8.61
8.72
8.82
8.93
9.03
9.14
9.25
9.36
9.46
9.57
9.68
9.79
9.90
10.01
10.07
10.23
10.35
10.46
10.57


      The visual accumulation tube is a convenient and sjmple method to use but is restricted to
sand fraction quantification (Schiebe et al., 1981). The researcher simply pours the sand into a long
water-filled column and at specified times measures the height of the accumulated sands at the
bottom of the tube. The individual fraction heights are converted into percentages by dividing by the
total sand column height.  The major difficulty with this method is determining the exact height of
the column since a flat surface rarely exists in the settled sands.

      Sedimentation balances work by measuring the weight of the settled particles from the soil
suspension by placement of the weighing pan within the settling column. Siebert (1979)  reported
excellent correlations between the sedimentation balance and the optical microscope using glass
beads, the hydrometer (to be discussed) on geologic samples, and the pipette (to be discussed) on

-------
                                                                Chapter:
                                                                Version:
                                                                Date:
6
2.1
May 22,1995
7 of 20
 marine sediments. Complications may exist if the weighing pan is suspended into the suspension
 from above due to particle settling on balance parts other than the weighing pan.

      Elutriation methods, i.e. constant flow systems, depend upon rising currents of water with
 different velocities to separate particles (Kilmer and Alexander, 1949; Boavers and Jones, 1966). With
 decreasing current velocity, finer particles are carried to the top of one collection container and
 transferred to another container (with a different flow velocity) while the coarser particles settle in
 the initial collection container.  Once the particles  are separated, particle contents are determined
 by drying and weighing of the separated fractions.  Failures in this system result from the excessive
 time  required (up to 48 hours) to separate clay fractions, clogging in  transfer tubes by larger
 particles, difficulty in maintaining a constant flow velocity causing {sedimentation.  Beavers and
 Jones (1966) found that if properly maintained, the elutriator produced1 clay contents within ± 2% of
 the results obtained by the pipette method.
                                                                 i
      The hydrometer, although designed primarily to determine silt and clay fractions, can also be
 used to determine sand contents.  The hydrometer and a similar measurement instrument, the
 plummet, are usually used to determine total sand content and not individual sand fractions.  Both
 instruments work on the principle  that density  differences occur as a result of particle settling.
 Density differences change the buoyancy of the suspension resulting in different hydrometer or
 plummet readings, that are directly related to the  various particle sizes, at different times. Problems
 with this method include difficulty in reading the hydrometer, sample disturbance during instrument
 insertion, particle settling on the hydrometer surface, and particles settling below the hydrometer
 leaving an area of decreased density. The increased speed of analysis, however, may override these
 relatively small errors depending upon operator  need and final data usage (Kilmer and Alexander,
 1949; Gee and  Bauder, 1986).  Liu et al. (1966), compared the hydrometer with the pipette method
 and found good correlations (r = 0.899 to 0.980) in clay contents between the two methods in a
 wide  variety of soils from eleven states with the hydrometer method yielding slightly greater clay
 contents than the pipette method.

 Silt and Clay Fractions

      Most PSA method development has been devoted to quantifying the silt and clay fractions.
 New methods were developed to decrease the extensive time required to obtain the results using
earlier methods.    Some  of  these earlier  methods included: optical microscopy, decantation,
centrifugation,  elutriation, the use  of floats and the manometer,  pijaetting, and the hydrometer
method. The majority of the earlier methods, excluding grain counting by optical microscopy, were
based on particle settling following Stokes' Law.

      One of the earliest methods used to quantify silt and clay fractions was through repeated
decantation, i.e., the Atterburg method (Stein, 1985). This  method involves shaking a dispersed soil
into suspension, and the removal of the supernatant containing particles of the desired size and
finer until a clear supernatant was obtained. Decantation can also t>e used in the separation of
sands from the silt and clay fractions. Although this method is effective for the separation of silt

-------
                                                              Chapter:     6
                                                              Version:     2.1
                                                              Date:        May 22, 1995
                                                              Page:        8 of 20


and clay fractions, its major drawback is the extensive time required for the analyses. Kilmer and
Alexander (1949) reported that about 7 days were required to separate eight to ten samples.

     A variation on the decantation method was the use of a centrifuge to shorten the settling time.
Centrifugation markedly increased the gravitational acceleration (fl) as defined in  Stokes' Law
thereby shortening the time required for particle settling. After centrifuging, the supernatant was
decanted  and the soil  resuspended  into solution.  The process was repeated  until a  clear
supernatant was obtained.

     The  manometer and float techniques measure particle-size distribution based on changes in
suspension density.  The manometer measures  resultant pressure head  changes  within the
suspension due to the settling of particles below the measurement arm. Various floats of different
densities  were placed in the  suspension  and the time was recorded for a given density float  to
reach a certain depth in the suspension.  Alternatively, the depth to which the float sank after a
specified settling time was recorded. The time or depth measurement was converted to particle-size
percentages using variations of  Stokes' Law.  The manometer and floats both had the inherent
problem of remaining in suspension throughout the  measurement period which allowed for particle
sedimentation on instrument surfaces, thereby affecting  the  final results.   Furthermore, the
manometer was difficult to read due to small pressure changes and floats of good quality were
difficult to obtain (Rose, 1954).

     The most common technique for PSA of silt and clay fractions is the pipette method. This
method is perhaps the •standard" method to which most other PSA techniques have been compared.
The  pipette method  consists of bringing the dispersed sample into suspension, allowing an
appropriate settling time, and sampling to a specified depth using a pipette of known volume. The
extracted aliquot is dried, weighed, corrected for the weight contribution of the dispersion agent, and
converted into weight percent silt or clay. A variation on the pipette method, the Andreason pipette,
employs the same technique  except that the pipette is permanently mounted in the sedimentation
cylinder (Siebert, 1979). Problems arise from the use of the Andreason pipette due to settling of the
sample on the pipette and a disruption of the particle settling  pathway.

     With advances in electronic and X-ray technologies and improvements  in various sensing
devices, several new methods have been developed to enhance the speed of PSA.  These methods
work on  the principles  of:   (1)  photoextinction of white light,  (2) low-angle  forward scattering
(Fraunhofer diffraction) of laser light, (3) X-ray absorption, and (4) electrical conductivity.  Methods
employing photoextinction and X-ray absorption techniques are based on particle settling following
Stokes' Law.

     The hydrophotometer and  the turbidity meter are  two instruments that determine PSA  by
photoextinction of white light. PSA is performed by passing a  light beam through a suspension of
a dispersed sample and measuring the amount of light transmitted through the sample.  Singer et
al. (1988)  reported that five samples could be analyzed in 1 hr, 40 min using the hydrophotometer.
These authors, in a comparison experiment of the Malvern Laser Sizar (to be discussed), Electrozone
Particle Counter (to be discussed), the Sedigraph (to be discussed), and the hydrophotometer using

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
            6
            2.1
            May 22, 1995
            9 of 20
sorted and glacial silt standards, reported that all four methods worked well on the sorted silt
standards.  However, they reported that the hydrophotometer displayed a slight shift toward the
coarser particle sizes in the mean and mode of the particle-size distribution when the glacial silt
standards were used. Moreover, they found the hydrophotometer to have  the poorest precision
among the four instruments for polymodal samples.  Samples containing silt-clay mixtures posed
the greatest analytical problems due to light dispersion,  increased fluid! viscosity, and particle-
particle interactions.  Initial turbulence preventing the settling of the silt and clay particles during
sample suspension is also a problem with the hydrophotometer.

   .  Two instruments that use a laser light source for PSA are the Leeds and Northrup Microtrac
II1 and the Malvern Laser Sizer2.  These instruments operate by passing the las'er beam through
a continuous flow sample cell and quantifying the emergent beam.  As particle size increases, the
amount of scattered light increases, but the angle of scattering decreases. A collector lens focuses
the scattered light  to a  solid  state  photodiode detector array  which translates the  signal to a
proportional volumetric measurement.  The  range in measured particle sizes is from 700 to 0.7
microns for the Microtrac II Standard Range Analyzer and from 60 to 0.12 microns for the Microtrac
II Small Particle Analyzer. The Malvern Laser Sizer employs three different collector lenses, with
differing focal lengths, giving a measurable particle size range of 564 to 1,2 microns (Singer et at.,
1988).  Measurement  times can be set from 1 to 999 seconds with a sample size requirement of
approximately 0.05  grams to 2 grams for the Microtrac II Small Particle Analyzer and 0.5 to 20
grams for the Microtrac II Standard  Range Analyzer while  the Malvern Laser Sizer requires about
10 minutes per sample per lens.  One notable  advantage  of these systems is that they are not
dependent on particle settling and  are thus free from the secondary effects of particle shape,
density, optical properties, and settling fluid viscosity. In a comparison study conducted by Singer
et al. (1988), the Malvern Laser Sizer displayed a slight shift in the mean and mode of the particle-
size distribution toward the coarser fractions and had the poorest resolution  when sorted silts and
glacial silt standards  were tested. An additional problem with the laser system was that different
collector lenses do not yield the same particle-size distribution where overlapping  measurable
particle  sizes  occurred.  The occurrence of  this type of problem in the Microtrac II systems is
unknown by the author.
                                                                'i
     The  Micromeritics Sedigraph 51003 combines X-ray absorption and particle settling for the
quantification  of silt and  clay particles.  A finely collimated beam of low energy X-rays is passed
through a vertically moving sample cell. The  sample cell is  moved vertically at a controlled rate (to
increase the effective settling time)  and the  emergent X-ray beam is detected and converted into
particle-size data. The Sedigraph 5100 has a measurement range of 300 to 0.1 microns equivalent
spherical diameter and uses a 50 mL dispersed sample whose precise concentration is not required.
The time  required to  process one sample with particle sizes ranging from 100 to  1 micron is
    1 Leeds and Northrup, Sumneytown Pike, North Wales, PA 19454.

    2Malyem Instruments Inc., 10 Southville Road, Southborough, MA

    3 Micromeritics Instrument Corporation, One Micromeritics Drive,
 01772

Norcross, GA  30093-1877

-------
                                                               Chapter:    @
                                                               Version:     2.1
                                                               Date:       May 22,1995
                                                               Page:       10 of 20


generally around 30 minutes with 100 minutes required for analysis to an endpoint of 0.2 microns
using the Sedigraph 5000 (Welch et al., 1979; Berezin and Voronin, 1981). Multiple scans are required
for this wide range in particle sizes. In comparison studies with the pipette method, the Sedigraph
indicated a finer particle-size distribution and was more precise than the pipette (Welch et al., 1979;
Berezin and Voronin, 1981). Several concerns with the Sedigraph system are that Instrument down
time may be a factor (Schiebe et al.,  1981), organic matter sensitivity (Berezin and Voronin, 1981),
availability of qualified operators (Schiebe et al., 1981).  Although the precise sample concentration
is not required, a given concentration range is required for optimal  instrument performance.  At
suspension concentrations of less than 2% by volume, the Sedigraph was found to be both accurate
and precise, yet above that point, a shift toward the finer particle sizes was noted (Singer et al.,
1988). Stein (1985) reported that soils high in montmorillonite caused problems with the Sedigraph
due to the thixotropic properties of montmorillonite.

      The Coulter Counter TAII4 and the Elzone 1805 (also cited in the literature as the Electrozone
System) determine PSA by measuring changes in  the electrical conductivity as particles pass
through a small orifice. As the particles pass through the orifice, the electrolyte is displaced, and
a resistance between the electrodes (on both sides of the orifice) is  created.  This resistance
increase is  measured by impulse .height  and discriminantly counted in a multichannel  analyzer.  A
dilute sediment concentration and continual mixing of the  sample are required to prevent large
particle settling and to eliminate particle coincidence (i.e. particles moving through the orifice at the
same time resulting in the counting of a coarser particle size). These instruments are capable of
measuring particle  sizes from about  1200 to 0.4 microns and require between 10  seconds and 10
minutes per sample.  Similar to the laser techniques, the Coulter  Counter TAII and Elzone  180 are
true sizing instruments that measure particles regardless of their densities, shapes, and the  settling
liquid viscosity, which are important factors in methods employing particle settling. Several major
disadvantages of these systems are (1) multiple orifice sizes are required to cover the range  in
particle sizes for soils, (2) electrolyte selection,  (3) orifice  clogging, (4) particle coincidence, the
necessity to  remove  the previously measured coarser particles  prior to  analysis with each
sequentially smaller orifice (Graf. 1979b), and (5) the inability of the system to measure the complete
clay fraction.   Pennington and Lewis (1979) compared the  Coulter Counter TAII  with the pipette
method using a variety of Idaho soils and found good correlation between the two methods for the
silt fractions (r2 - 0.80). For the clay  fractions, however, the Coulter Counter results were between
one-third to one-half lower than the pipette when,clay contents ranged between 29 and 33%.
 Reference Method

      The  reference method for PSA, even in light of the more sophisticated technology now
 available, is still the separation of sand fractions and the pipette method to quantify silt and clay
 fractions.  Organic matter removal using hydrogen peroxide and sample dispersion using sodium
    4 Coulter Electronics, Inc., 650 W. 20th Street, Hialeah, FL 33010

    s Particle Data, Inc., P.O. Box 265, Elmhurst, IL 60126

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
6
2.1
May 22, 1995
11 of 20
 hexametaphosphate are recommended.  The use of the hydrometer is a viable alternative due to its
 increased speed in comparison with the pipette and can be used if time is a critical factor. Other
 previously discussed methods ha\e limitations, such as limited particle size ranges either on the
 coarse (i.e., can not determine particles up to 2 mm in diameter) or fine (i.e., generally limited to
 around 0.1 micron and coarser fractions) ends, instrument cost, multiple reading requirements to
 capture entire particle-size distribution, excessive time requirements for analysis ^or sample
 preparation,  increased technician  skill requirements,  and do not have  widely  accepted  and
 documented standard operating procedures, which decreases their usefulness for PSA. However,
 with continual improvements in the electronics and X-ray technologies, fast, reliable particle-size
 determination of the silt and clay fractions may soon be possible.

 NOTE:  This reference method is for mineral horizon PSA analysis only.

 Summary of Method

      Organic  matter is  removed from the sample.  The sand fractions are separated from the silt
 and clay fractions by wet sieving. The silt and clay separates are suspended in water. Aliquots are
 taken from the suspension under the specified conditions, dried, and then weighed. The resulting
 gravimetric data allows calculation of the percentages of each particle-size fraction.

 Interferences and Shortcomings                          '<
                                                               . i    .
     The sedimentation cylinder should not be disturbed nor may the temperature  vary while the
 soil in suspension is settling.  The use of forceps, finger cots, cotton or vinyl gloves are required to
 avoid adding weight from moisture, body salts, or body oils when handling weighing bottles, pans,
 etc. Other sources of error include the deviation of the specific gravity of the soil particles from the
 assumed 2.65 g/cm3,  rising air bubbles after mixing interfering with particle settling, changes in
 settling velocity due to friction on the sides of the cylinder, and the fact that the particles, especially
 the clays, are not spherical.

 Safety

     Use forceps or heat resistant gloves to remove weighing containers from hot ovens.  Use
 waterproof gloves  and  safety goggles  while handling H2O2. Follow standard laboratory safety
practices when handling reagents and equipment.
Apparatus and Equipment

     • Erlenmeyer flask, beaker, or other suitable container, 250 ml_ or equivalent.

     • Beakers, 125 ml_ or equivalent.

     • Reciprocating shaker, 120 oscillations per minute.

-------
                                                         Chapter:     6
                                                         Version:     2.1
                                                         Date:        May 22, 1995
                                                         Page:        12 of 20


• Sedimentation cylinders, (1 litre graduated cylinders, optional).

• Stirrer, motor-driven.

• Stirrer, hand. Fasten a circular piece of perforated plastic to one end of a rod.

• Shaw pipette rack, or equivalent.

• Pipettes, 25 mL automatic (Lowry with overflow bulb, or equivalent).

• Polyurethane foam pipe-insulation; constant temperature batch (± 1° C); or temperature
  controlled room (±1° C).

• Steve shaker, 1.25 cm vertical and lateral movement, 500 oscillations per minute, or
  equivalent.  Unit must accommodate a nest of sieves.

• Glass weighing bottles, 90 mL, wide-mouth with screw caps, or equivalent, capable of
  withstanding intermittent  heatings to 110° C.

• Top loading balance (0.01 g sensitivity).

• Electronic analytical balance (0.1 mg sensitivity).

• Set of sieves, square-mesh, woven phosphor-bronze or stainless steel wire cloth; U.S. Series
  and Tyler Screen Scale equivalent designation as follows:

           Nominal                      U.S.                              Tyler
         Opening (mm)                  No.                            Mesh Size

             10                           18                               16
             0.5                           35                               32
             0.25                         60                               60
             0.105                        MO                               15°
             0.053                       270                              270

 • Receiving pan, used with sieves.

 • Cover glasses, watch glasses, or equivalent

 • Thermometer, range 10 to 120° C.

 • Desiccator and desiccant, P2O5.

 • Hot plate (block digester, optional).


-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Psige:
6
2.1
May 22,1995
13 of 20
Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • Hydrogen peroxide (H2O.j), 30 to 35 percent.

     • Sodium carbonate (Na2COg).

     • Sodium hexametaphosphate
     • water-Water used in all preparations should conform to AS1FM specifications for Type I
       reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • Dispersing agent - Dissolve 35.7 grams (NaPOg), and 7.94 grams of NaCO3 per litre of
       detonized (DI) water.

     • Aluminum weighing dishes, or equivalent.
Calibration and Standardization

     Calibrate thermometers periodically to ensure that they are measuring temperature accurately.
Temperature of the suspensions should not vary more than ± 1° C.
Procedure


     The reference method is divided into four procedures. The first procedure is the removal of
organic matter which may be excluded for samples  with low organic matter contents at the
discretion of the analyst. The remaining three procedures, namely, sample dispersion, sand fraction
quantification, and silt and clay quantification, are essential for the determination of PSA.

NOTE: The procedures described are for mineral horizons only.


Procedure One - Removal of Organic Matter             \
                                                             I
Step 1 -   Weigh 10 ± 0.01 g air-dried soil into a tared Erlenmeyer flaslk, beaker, or equivalent.  For
          soils with low clay contents, it may be necessary to double the amount of soil in order
          to have a sufficient measurable quantity of clay. Doubling the amount of soil does not
          require any adjustments to the remaining steps in this procedure.

Step 2 -   Add 50 ml_ of DI water, followed by 5 ml_ of H2O2. Cover the flask with a watch glass.
          If a violent reaction occurs, repeat the H2O2 treatment periodically until no more frothing
          occurs.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
                                                                         2.1
                                                                         May 22,1995
                                                                         14 of 20
Step 3 -
          Heat the flask to approximately 90°  C on an electric hot plate.  Add  H2O2 in 5 mL
          amounts at 10-15 minute intervals until the organic matter is destroyed as determined
          visually by the lack of effervescence. Continue heating for approximately 30 minutes to
          remove excess H2O2.
  NOTE:
          Some long-chain organics tend to produce a stable foam which continues to build upon
          heating. The foam can be controlled by periodic streams of water or methanol from a
          wash bottle.                                                            -

          Do not let samples on hot plate boil dry or certain clays may collapse and may not be
          successfully dispersed.

          Dry the sample overnight in an  oven at 105° C, cool the sample in a desiccator, and
          weigh the H2O2-treated sample plus flask to the nearest 0.01 g.  Record the weight of
          the soil + flask.  The oven-dry  soil weight can then be calculated by subtracting the
          flask weight from the soil + flask weight. Use the weight of the oven-dry, H2O2-treated
          sample as the soil weight (Treated Sample Weight) for calculating percentages of the
          particle-size fractions..

Procedure Two - Sample Dispersion and Separation of Sand from Silt and Clay
  NOTE:
Step 4 -
Step 1 -
 Step 2 -
          Add 10 mL of dispersing agent to the flask containing the oven-dry treated sample.
          Bring the volume to approximately 200 mL using DI water. Stopper the flask and shake
          overnight on a horizontal reciprocating shaker at 120 oscillations per minute.

          Place a 270-mesh sieve on top of the sedimentation  cylinder.  Wash the dispersed
          sample onto the sieve with DI water. Avoid using jets of water because they may break
          the fine mesh of the sieve.  Silt, clay, and some very fine sand will pass through the
          sieve into the cylinder. The sand fractions will remain  in the sieve.  It is important to
          wash all particles of less than 0.05 mm diameter through the sieve. Gently tapping the
          sieve clamp with the side of the hand may facilitate sieving.

 NOTE:   A clamp and ring stand may be used to hold the sieve  in place.

Step 3 -   Continue washing the sand until suspension volume in the cylinder is approximately 900
          mL

 NOTE:   For soils high in silt,  wet sieving may be inadequate to separate aH the silt from the
          sand fraction.  In this situation, it is recommended that the sample remaining on the
          sieve be air-dried overnight on the sieve resting on a watch glass to catch any silt
          passing through during drying. Dry sieve the sample the next day and add any portion
          passing through the sieve to the sedimentation column prior to proceeding to step 4.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
6
2.1
May 22. 1995
15 of 20
 Step 4 -   Remove the sieve from the cylinder.  Wash the sand into a tared evaporating dish or
           original flask with DI water. Dry the sand overnight at 105° C.

 Step 5 -   Dilute the silt and clay suspension in the cylinder to 1 litre with DI water.  Cover the
           cylinder with a watch glass.

 Procedure Three - Sand Fraction Quantification.

 Step 1 -    Wash the sands quantitatively from the sieve (Procedure Two, Step 4) into a beaker or
           equivalent drying container with DI water and dry the sample overnight at 105° C.

 Step 2 -    Remove the sands from the oven and allow to cool to room temperature in a desiccator.
           Weigh the total dry sand to the nearest 0.01 g and record the weight.

 Step 3 -    Stack sieves from the largest mesh  opening  (1.0 mm) on  top to the smallest mesh
           opening on the bottom.  Below the smallest mesh sieve, place the receiving pan.

 Step 4 -    Quantitatively transfer the dried sand to the top sieve.   i

 Step 5 -    Cover and secure the stack of sieves in the shaker.  Shake the nest of sieves for 3
           minutes.                                             ;

 Step 6 -    Quantitatively transfer the sand fractions to tared aluminum weighing dishes (tared to
           the nearest 0.01 g).  Weigh each sand fraction to the  nearest 0.01  g and record the
           weight. The sand fractions contained on top of the sieves are the very coarse, coarse,
           medium, fine, and very fine listed from top to bottom sievw, respectively.

 Procedure Four - Silt and Clay Quantification by Pipetting
                                                               \
  NOTE:    All pipetting  should be  performed in a location free  from drafts  and temperature
           fluctuations. A temperature-controlled room, constant-tem|3erature water bath, or foam
           insulation may be used.
                                                               f -

  NOTE:    A blank sample should be prepared with each run to determine the weight contribution
           of the dispersing agent to the weight of the pipetted aliquot. The blank sample should
           contain 10 ml_ of the dispersing agent only,  diluted to  1 litre.  The blank sample should
           proceed through all the steps in the following procedure. The net weight of this blank
           will enter into the final fraction quantification as the RBLANK in the formulae.

Step 1 -    Allow 12 to 24 hours for the suspension temperature to equilibrate to room temperature
           if temperature control is being maintained by use of either foam insulation, or a constant
           temperature room, or to equilibrate in the constant temperature water bath.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
6
2.1      i
May 22, 1995
16 of 20
Step 2 -    Refill sedimentation cylinder to the 1 litre mark with DI water at the same temperature
           as the analysis to be performed.

Step 3 -    Stir the material in the sedimentation cylinder for 6 minutes with the motor-driven stirrer.
           Stir 8 minutes if the suspension has been standing for more then 16 hours. If stoppers
           of adequate size are available, it is preferable to stopper the cylinder and invert.  Care
           must be taken to ensure that the stopper is held tightly in the cylinder. After the cylinder
           has been inspected to ensure that the fine particles are not adhering to the glass walls
           or bottom of the cylinder, repeat the inversion procedure at least 6 additional times.

Step 4 -    Remover the stirrer and either (1) cover the cylinder with a length of polyurethane foam
           pipe-insulation, (2) immerse the cylinder in a constant-temperature water bath, or (3)
           place  the cylinder in a temperature-controlled room.

Step 5 -    Record the temperature of the solution in the cylinder by gently lowering a thermometer,
           5 cm into the suspension. Support the thermometer with a clamp to reduce disturbance
           of the suspension.

  NOTE:    A separate cylinder of DI water may be used to monitor the temperature.

Step 6 -    Stir the suspension for 30 seconds  with a hand stirrer using an up-and-down motion.
           Record the time when the stirring is complete.  Do not move, stir, or otherwise disturb
           the cylinder from this point until all pipetting has been completed.

Step 7 -    Determine the appropriate settling  time required for  the 0.02- to 0.005 mm fraction
           (medium silt) using Table 1.  The resultant  pipetting for this  fraction will be referred to
           as Pipette #1 in the calculations.

Step 8 -    About 30 seconds before the sedimentation time has elapsed, slowly lower the Lowry
           automatic pipet 10 cm into the suspension. (A 25-mL volumetric pipet premarked for a
           10-cm depth and clamped firmly in place on a stand may be used.)

Step 9 -    At the appropriate time, slowly fill the  pipet (allow for about 12 seconds).  Carefully
           remove the pipet from the suspension.

Step 10 -  Wipe the outside of the pipet clean and empty the contents into a drying container, such
           as a wide mouth glass weighing bottle or aluminum weighing tins, tared to the nearest
           0.1 mg. Rinse the pipette once with DI water and add the rinse water to the contents
           of the bottle.

Step 11 -  Dry the bottle or tin and contents in an oven overnight at 105° C. Cool in a desiccator
           over phosphorus pentoxide (P2Og).  Weigh  and  record net weight to nearest 0.1 mg.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
2.1
May 22, 1995
17 of 20
  Step 12 -  Repeat steps 7 through 11 for the 0.005 to 0.002 mm (PipBtte #2) and the <0 002 mm
            (Pipette #3) clay fraction.  The <0.002 mm fraction may bte pipetted at a time ranging
            from 5 to 8 hours depending on the temperature and the depth of sampling as listed in
            Tables 1 and 2. The use of Table  1 is strongly recommended.

  Step 13 -  Determination of the fine clay fraction (<0.0002 mm mean diameter) must be performed
            by centnfuging due to the excessively long time required for sedimentation (up to 39
            days) and the influence of Brownian motion on the settling of Fine clay particles (Kilmer
            and Alexander, 1949).  Required centrifuging times may be calculated by incorporation
            of the appropriate gravitational acceleration ($)  into Stokes' Law.  A more complete
            presentation of this procedure is presented by Sheldrick (1984).


  Quality Control


  Precision

       One sample should be analyzed in duplicate  with each run of thirty samples.  The standard
 deviation among similar size fraction should be within 3.0 weight % for the sand and silt fractions
 and within 2.0 weight percent for clay fractions.

 Accuracy

      Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
 for accuracy should be ±10% from the known fraction concentration of the standard or within the
 accuracy windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

 Method Blanks

      One method blank should be analyzed with each batch of thirty samples.  A method blank
 consists of a 25 mL aliquot of the diluted dispersion solution (10 mL of the hexametaphosphate
 dispersion solution diluted to 1 L), dried, and weighed.  The method blank weight is used in the final
 calculation of the silt and clay contents.

 Quality Control Preparation Sample

      A well-characterized soil having a minimum of 5 percent sand, silt, and clay should be analyzed
once  per analytical run.  This sample  is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run
preasion. Quantified values of the QCCS should be  within ±10% of the known quantities within the
sample with checking only being performed on the total sand, silt, and clay fractions  Between-run
p;ec*10" can  *? determined bv analyzing  the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term
standard deviation  If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more
than three standard deviations, a new QCPS should be obtained.

-------
                                                        Chapter:
                                                        Version:
                                                        Date:
                                                        Page:
                                                                6
                                                                2.1
                                                                May 22, 1995
                                                                18 of 20
Suggested Run Format

MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
Samples 9 to 16, DUP,
Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
Samples 26 to 30.

      where:  MB   = method blank
              QCPS - quality control preparation sample
              DUP   = duplicate sample
              SRM   = standard reference material
 Calculations

  NOTE:   All quantities of individual size fractions are calculated in weight percent.
            SAND =
                 I     VERY       COARSE  MEDIUM + FINE +   VERY  }
               _ [COARSE SAND *  SAND  *  SAND    SAND   FINE SAND]
                                 Treated Sample Weight
                                                                          X100
             SILT = 100% - (SAND + CLAY)

                  = (Oven-dry Net Weight of Pipette #3  - RBLANK)  x 1000 x 1(X)

                              Treated Sample Weight               25

        VERY     _ Oven -dry net weight of very coarse sand x 1QO
    COARSE SAND           Treated Sample Weight
COARSE SAND
   MEDIUM
                   (Oven-dry net weight of coarse sand) x

                         Treated Sample Weight
                                     °f

                                                     * ino
                         Treated Sample Weight
      FINE SAND = (Oven-dry net weight of fine sand)  x 10Q
                        Treated Sample Weight

         VERY    = (Oven -dry net weight of very fine sand)  x
      FINE SAND          Treated Sample Weight

-------
                                                              'Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                                                        2.1
                                                                        May 22, 1995
                                                                        19 of 20
 COARSE SILT = SILT - (MEDIUM SILT + FINE SILT)


MEDIUM SILT =
                           of Pipette #1  - ODNW of Pipette #2)  y 1000 v
                           Treated Sample Weight
                                                                   25
       FINE SILT = (OPNW of Pipette #2  - ODNW of Pipette #3)  x 1000 x
                               Treated Sample Weight               25  •
       where:   ODNW = oven-dry net weight.
 References                                                ;
                                                               i
 American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of A8TM Standards, Vol. 11.01,
      Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D-1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia.
      PA.                                                      ;
                                                               j

 Beavers, A.H., and R.L. Jones. 1966. Elutriator for fractionating silt. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc.
      30:126-128.

 Berezin, P.N., and A.D. Voronin. 1981. Use of a Sedigraph for the particle-size analysis of soils. Sov.
      Soil Sci. 13:101-109.
                                                               i

 El-Swaify, S.A. 1980. Physical and mechanical properties of oxisols. In BXG. Theng (ed.) Soils of
      triable charge. New Zealand Soc. Soil Sci., Lower Hutt, New 2baland. pp. 303-324.

Gee, G.W., and J.W. Bauder. 1986. Particle-size analysis. In A. Klute (ed.), Methods of Soil Analysis,
      Part 1. Agronomy 9:383-411.

Graf, J. 1979a. Sizing with modern image analyzers. In Stockham, J.D., and E.G. Fochtman (ed.)
      Particle size analysis. Ann Arbor Sci. Pub., Inc. Ann Arbor, MI. pp. 35-44.

Graf, J. 1979b. The "Electrozone" counter: Applications to nonaqueouss particle-fluid systems. In
      Stockham, J.D., and E.G. Fochtman (ed.) Particle size analysis. Ann Arbor Sci. Pub., Inc. Ann
      Arbor, MI. pp. 65-76.                                       \

Kilmer, V.J., and LT. Alexander. 1949. Methods of making mechanical;analyses of soils. Soil Sci.
      68:15-24.                                                  ;

Liu, T.K., R.T. Odell, W.C. Etter, and T.H. Thornburn. 1966. A comparison of clay contents determined
      by hydrometer and pipette methods using reduced major axis analysis. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc.
      30:665-669.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
6
2.1
May 22, 1995
20 of 20
McKeague, JA (ed.) 1978. Manual on soil sampling and methods of analysis. Canadian Soc. Soil
     Sci., Ottawa, Canada.

Mehra, O.P., and M.L Jackson. 1960. Iron oxide removal from soils and clays by a dithionite-citrate
     system buffered with sodium bicarbonate. In Clays and Clay Min. Proc. 7th Conf. Natl. Acad.
     Sci. Natl. Res. Council Pub., Washington, DC. pp. 237-317.

Pennington, K.L, and G.C. Lewis. 1979. A comparison of electronic and pipet methods for mechanical
     analysis of soils. Soil Sci. 128:280-284.

Rose, H.E. 1954. The measurement of particle size in very fine powders. Constable and Comp. Ltd.
     London, England.

Schiebe, F.R., N.H. Welch, and LR. Cooper. 1981. Measurement of fine silt and clay size distributions.
     Trans. Am. Soc. Agric. Eng. 491-496.

Sheldrick, B.H. (ed.) 1984. Analytical methods manual 1984. Land Resource Res. Inst. Contribution
     84-30. Land Resource Res. Inst. Ottawa, Ontario.

Siebert, P.C. 1979. Simple sedimentation methods including the Andreason pipette and the Cahn
     sedimentation balance. In Stockham, J.D., and E.G. Fochtman (ed.) Particle Size Analysis. Ann
     Arbor Sci. Pub., Inc. Ann Arbor, MI. pp. 45-56.

Singer, J.K., J.B. Anderson, M.T. Ledbetter, I.N. McCave, K.P.N. Jones,  R. Wright. 1988. An
     assessment of analytical techniques for the size analysis of fine-grained  sediments. J. Sed.
     Pet. 58:534-543.

Stein, R. 1985. Rapid grain-size analyses of clay and silt fraction  by Sedigraph 5000D: Comparison
     with Coulter Counter and Atterberg methods. J. Sed. Pet. 55:590-615.

United States Department of Agriculture/Soil Conservation Service 1992. Soil survey laboratory
     methods manual. Soil Survey Investigations Report  No. 42. U.S. Government Printing Office,
     Washington, DC.

Welch, N.H., P.B. Allen, and D.J. Galindo. 1979. Particle-size analysis by pipette and Sedigraph. J.
     Environ. Qual. 8:543-546.

Yamate, G., and J.D. Stockham. 1979. Sizing particles using the microscope. In Stockham, J.D., and
     E.G. Fochtman (ed.) Particle size analysis. Ann Arbor Sci. Pub., Inc.  Ann Arbor, ML pp. 23-33.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Vorsion:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
7
2.1
May 22, 1995
1of 6
                                         SoilpH
 Introduction
      Soil pH is one of the most indicative chemical measurements in soil.  Soil pH is a measure of
 the hydrogen ion activity in the soil solution and can, therefore, be considered as the intensity factor
 for soil acidity.  The importance of soil pH is that it is integral to many other soil properties such
 as the solubility of compounds, the availability of plant nutrients, thei  relative bonding  of ions to
 exchange sites, and the activity of various soil microorganisms. It is inteqral in the sense that soil
 pH is both a symptom and a cause of the many reactions that occur within soil.

      Soil pH is recommended as a  parameter for terrestrial monitoring programs for several
 reasons. One of the effects of acid deposition on soil is soil acidification.  Decreases in soil pH
 resulting from soil acidification will reflect the overall decline in base saturation and an increase in
 exchangeable acidity (Bache, 1980).   Soil pH can be measured with relatively high  precision by
 present analytical methods. The spatial variability of soil pH is also lower than a majority of other
 soil properties (Arp and Krause,  1984).  The temporal variability in Hhis parameter  can also be
 minimized through the selection of appropriate methods.            i


 Review of Methods

      The value obtained for pH in  a  soil is very  dependent upon  the method  used for its
 measurement.  Several factors that influence the measured pH value include the soil/solution ratio
 e ectrolyte concentration, CO2 content of the soil/solution, temperature, nature and placement of the
 electrodes, and treatment of a soil prior to measurement. Common soil/solution ratios on a weight
 basis include 1:1,1:2,1:4,1:5, and 1:10,  and saturated pastes (McLean, 1982). Common electrolytes
 5iS™ "?r.   measurement °f soil  pH include deionized water, 0.01 M CaCI2, 1 N KCI and 0002 M
 CaClj, (Cappo et al.,  1987).  The  higher the electrolyte concentration, the larger the amount of
 exchangeable acidity displaced from soil exchange sites with the subsequent lowering of the pH of
 the soil  solution.  The displacement of hydrogen ions by the  catioms of the salts can also be
 accompanied by the displacement of exchangeable aluminum, which upon hydrolysis, increases the
 H  ions  in the soil solution.   The CO2 content of soil  influences the measured pH  through the
 formation of carbonic acid as it dissolves in water. One reason for stirring and allowing a soil to
 stand for a period  of time prior to measurement is to allow the soil!  CO, content to come  into
 equilibrium with CO2 in the air. Commonly used times are 30 minutes or 60 minutes.

      The temperature at the time of measurement affects not only the activity of the H+ ion  but
 the calibration of the instrument.  The  placement of the  electrodes in relationship to the sediment
 or the supernatant can have a marked  effect. This effect has been attributed to the liquid junction
 potential at the calomel electrode and to differences in H+ concentration with distance from  soil
 particles (McLean, 1985). The prior treatment of  a soil can affect the pH measurement.  The method
 of drying and storage conditions of the  soil can be important. The pH of air-dried soils are generally
 lower than field moist samples.                                   !
Reference Method

     The reference solutions for mixing with soil for the soil pH measurement are 0.01 M CaCI, and
deionized water.  Measurement in these two solutions has been recommended by the Canadian
Society of Soil Science (McKeague, 1976), the American Society of Soil Science (McLean, 1985) and
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (Cappo et al. 1986), and are widely used by soil testing
laboratories.  Measurement of soil pH in 1  N  KCI is not recommended since the solution is not

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
7
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 6
representative of electrolyte concentrations found in most natural soils.   The high electrolyte
concentration of the KCI solution will result in excessive amounts of exchangeable acidity being
displaced by this electrolyte.  Measurement  of soil  pH in 0.01 M CaCI2 has the advantage of
minimizing temporal variability in soil pH due to seasonal salt fluctuations, is independent of
soil/solution ratios, and it minimizes potential problems with liquid junction potentials by flocculating
soil suspensions.  Another standard solution  for measuring soil pH is deionized water for which
numerous amounts of data are available for comparison. These two measures of soil pH are highly
correlated. If both pH values are measured, inaccurate data points can be identified as not being
internally consistent.

     The reference soihsolution (by weight) ratios are 1:1 for mineral soils and 1:5 for organic soils.
The saturated paste technique for measuring  soil pH  is not recommended due tq poorer precision
of measurement and potential problems  with liquid junction potentials.  Laboratory methods are
recommended over field methods due to the difficulty of obtaining reproducible results in the field.
Improved control over temperature, sample mixing, and subsampling are possible in the laboratory
whereas this control is lost during field pH measurements.

     A standard KCI combination electrode with a sleeve is preferred for measurement over the
double electrode system. The combination electrodes are simpler to handle and maintain, can be
used on smaller samples, have a constant distance between the junction and the glass electrodes,
and are less prone to potential stoppage of flow of electrolyte from the calomel electrode.

     A period of one hour is suggested for equilibration time with regular stirrings at 15 minute
intervals to allow the soil to come to equilibrium with the CO2 in the air in the laboratory.  The
method presented is an adaptation of the method presented by Cappo et al. (1986).


Summary of Method

     Two suspensions of each soil sample are prepared, one in DI water, and one in 0.01 M CaCI2.
The pH of each suspension is measured with a pH meter and a combination electrode.


Interferences and Shortcomings

     Soils high in salts, especially sodium (Na+) salts, may interfere with the pH reading and the
electrode response time.

      Clays may clog the KCI junction and may slow the electrode response time. Thorough cleaning
of the electrode between samples can help avoid this problem.

      Wiping the electrode dry with cloth, laboratory tissue, or similar materials or removing the
electrode from solution when the meter is not on standby may cause electrode polarization and,
therefore, should be avoided.

      The initial pH of a non-alkaline soil will usually be as much as 0.5 pH unit greater than the pH
taken after the sample has set for 30 minutes or longer.

      The pH will vary as much as 1.0 pH unit between the supernatant and soil sediment. Always
place  the electrode junction at the same distance above the surface of the soil  to maintain
uniformity in pH readings.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:'
                                                             Page:
                                 7
                                 2.1
                                 May 22, 1995
                                 3 of 6
Safety

     No specific hazards are associated with this procedure or with the required reagents  Normal
laboratory safety practices are to be observed.  Protective clothing and safety glasses should be
worn, especially when handling concentrated HCI and dry Ca(OH)2 to prepare reagents.


Apparatus and Equipment

     • digital pH/mV meter, capable of measuring pH to ± 0.01 pH unil! and potential to ± 1 mVand
       temperature to ± 0.5° C.  The meter must also have automatic temperature compensation
       capability.                                              i

     • pH and reference electrodes, high quality, low-sodium glass. Gel-Type reference electrodes
       must not be used.  A combination electrode is strongly recommended, and the procedure
       is written assuming that one  is used.   The Orion Ross combination pH electrode, or
       equivalent, with a retractable sleeve junction is preferred.  At least two electrodes, one a
       backup, should be available to the analytical laboratory.
                    '                                          'i
     • beakers, plastic or paper containers, 50 mL

     • glass stirring rods or disposable stirrers, one per sample.
                                                              i

Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • pH buffers of pH = 4, pH = 7, and pH = 10, for electrode calibration.

     • buffer of pH 4.0 as a quality control check standard (QCCS). The QCCS can be purchased,
       or it can be prepared from 0.05 M potassium hydrogen phthalate (KHC8H4O4 or KHP). This
       buffer must  be from a different container or lot than the standards used for electrode
       calibration.

       Dry KHP for 2 hours at 110° C, cool to room temperature in  a desiccator. Weigh 10.21 g of
       KHP, dissolve it in  DI water, and dilute the solution to 1.000 L  To preserve the KHP
       solution, add 1.0 mL of chloroform or one crystal (about 10  mm in diameter) of thymol per
       litre of the buffer solution.  This solution has the following  pH values at the temperatures
       given:
                          TfCl

                           15

                           20

                           25

                           30
pH

3.999

4.002

4.008

4.015
      water-Water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type I
      reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
7
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 6
      • stock calcium chloride solution (CaCI2, 1.0 M)--Dissolve 55.493 g of anhydrous CaCI2 in DI
        water and dilute to 500 mL

      • calcium chloride 0.01 M CaCI2-Dilute 20 mL of stock 1.0 M CaCI2 to 2.000 L with DI water.
        If the pH of this solution  is not between 5 and 6.5,  adjust the pH by addition of dilute
        Ca(OH)2 or HCI, as needed. Verify the concentration of the CaCI2 solution by measuring the
        electrical conductivity.  The specific conductivity should be 2.32 ± 0.08 mmho/cm at 25° C.
        If it is not, prepare fresh solution.

      • calcium hydroxide (Ca^HJJ-Dissolve 0.185 g Ca(OH)2 in  1 L of DI water.

      • hydrochloric acid (HCI)-Dilute 1 mL concentrated HCI to 1 L with DI water.

      • potassium chloride (KCI, 3 M)-Dissolve 224 g of KCI in DI water and dilute to 1 L.

      • potassium chloride (KCI, 0.1 M)-Dissolve 74.5 g of KCI in  DI water and dilute to 1 L
Calibration and Standardization

     For storage and readings, the electrode need only be immersed to cover the liquid junction of
the reference electrode (typically about 2.5 cm).

     Rinse electrode with DI water between each sample and each buffer to prevent solution carry-
over.  Do not rub or blot electrode dry because  this may produce a static electric charge and,
thereby, polarize the electrode.

     To prepare the pH electrode for use, move the band covering the fill hole and fill the reference
reservoir to the hole with 3 M KCI filling solution. Allow 5 minutes for the ceramic frit to become wet
with filling solution before immersing the electrode in sample or buffer. The retractable sleeve
junction allows easy cleaning of clay particles and other insoluble compounds that clog the junction
and, thereby, produce drift and  slow response.

     Each analyst must be thoroughly acquainted  with  the procedure and  familiar with all
instrument functions.   Read and follow all operating and start-up procedures for the pH meter.
Leave the instrument on standby and verify that the combination electrode is connected and that
the level of reference  filling solution is at  least 3 cm above the  sample surface.  Check the
temperature calibration by measuring room temperature of a solution with the electrode and meter
and with a thermometer.

     Calibrate the electrode at a minimum of two points that bracket the expected pH and that are
three pH units or more apart.  Use  standardized buffers of pH 4, 7, and 10 for samples  in the
expected pH range.

     Stir pH 4.0 buffer solution for 30 seconds, read the pH after equilibration, and adjust the meter,
if necessary.  Perform the step again,  using the pH 7.0 buffer.   Repeat measurements  and
adjustments until readings for both buffer solutions are within 0.1 pH units of the  respective true
buffer values. Repeat the process substituting a pH 10.0 buffer in place of the pH 4.0  buffer for
soils of pH greater than 7.0.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
7
2.1
May 22, 1995
5 of 6
 Procedure

 Step 1 -    Prepare two suspensions of each soil sample, one in DI water and one in 0.01 M CaCI2,
           using soil-to-solution ratios of 1:1 for mineral horizons and 1:5 For organic horizons. For
           mineral horizons, add 20 ml of the appropriate solution to 20.00 g soil.  For organic
           horizons, add 25 ml_ solution to 5.00 g soil.

 Step 2 -    Aljow soil to absorb  solution without stirring, then thoroughly  stir  the soil-solution
           mixture for 10 seconds with a glass stirring rod or disposable stirrer.  Stir again for  10
           seconds after 15, 30, 45, and 60 minutes.

 Step 3 -    After the final stirring, allow the  suspension to  settle for 1 minute.  Place the pH
           electrode in the supernatant of the soil suspension.

           For mineral soils, the electrode junction should be below the solution surface and above
           the soil-solution interface.

           Some organic soils swell, so there is no free water available. As long as the electrode
           junction is below the surface of the organic material,  an acceptable, repeatable reading
           is generally attained.  If  the reading is not stable, add enough solution to cover the
           electrode junction.  When the reading is stable, record pH to the nearest 0.01 pH unit.

 Step 4 -    Report the pH of the soil:DI water suspension and the soil:O.OI M CaCI2 suspension for
           each sample.

 Steps-    After measurements are completed, store the electrode in 0.1 M KCI  manufactured
           storage solution.  Do not let the sensing element and reference junction dry out.  The
           level of the storage  solution should be 1 inch below the filling solution level to prevent
           influx of the storage solution.  Periodically check that the electrode reservoir is full  of
           filling solution.                                        <
Quality Control
                                                                i
Precision

     One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples for each of the
following solutions:  DI water and 0.01 M CaCI2. To eliminate bias due to position in the run, the
routine  sample duplicate  should be analyzed  separately within the analytical run.  Within-run
precision is determined from duplicates based on absolute difference between the samples at an
acceptance limit for the difference of £ 0.1 pH unit.                 \

Quality Control Preparation Sample
                                                                \
     A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision.
Accuracy of the QCPS should be within ± 0.1 pH unit of the long-term mean.  Between-run precision
can be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard
deviation. If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more than three
standard deviations,  the run should be completely reanalyzed.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
                                               7
                                               2.1
                                               May 22, 1995
                                               6 of 6
Quality Control Check Standard

     A quality control check standard (QCCS), a pH 4.0 standard that is'either from a different
purchased lot or created at a different time, should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run.  Values for the QCCS should be 4.00 ±
0.05 pH units.

     It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems.  If
analyzed values deviate from  the long-term mean by  more than three standard deviations, the
instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

Suggested Run Format

QCCS, Samples 1 to 10,
QCCS, Samples 11 to 20,
QCCS, Samples 20 to 30, QCPS, DUP, QCCS.
       where:  QCCS
               QCPS
               DUP
quality control check standard
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
       NOTE: The run format presented is per solution (i.e., DI water or 0.01 M
 Calculations and Reporting

       No calculations are required to obtain pH values in pH units.
 References

 American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of   _ --- -
      Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM,
      Pennsylvania.

 Arp, PA and H.H. Krause. 1984. The forest floor: lateral variability as revealed by systematic
      sampling. Can. Soc. Soil Sci. 64:421-437.

 Bache  B W. 1980. The acidification of soils. ID Hutchinson, T.a, and M. Havas (eds.). Effects of acid
      precipitation on terrestrial ecosystems. NATO Conference Series, Volume 4. Plenum Press, New
      York. pp. 183-202.

 Cappo KA LJ. Blume, GA Raab, J.K. Bartz, and J.L Engels. 1987. Analytical methods manual for
      the Direct/Delayed Response Project soil survey. U.S. E^^e^l  Prot^wn  ^en°y'
      Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Las Vegas, NV. EPA 600/8-87/020.

 McKeague, JA (ed.). 1978. Manual on soil sampling and methods of analysis. Can. Soc. of Soil Sci.
      212 pp.

 McLean, E.O. 1982. Soil pH and lime requirement. In AL Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis.
      Part 2. 2nd ed. Agronomy 9:199-224.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
8
2.1
May 22, 1995
1of 8
                                    Organic Carbon
 Introduction
      In soil, carbon (C) occurs in mineral and organic forms.  In acid soils, where carbonate
 minerals are generally lacking, most C occurs in organic matter. Organic matter consists of plant,
 animal, and microbial  remains in various stages  of decomposition  plus  their highly-altered
 derivatives. The latter are collectively referred to as humic matter or humus. Humus maintains the
 physical condition, improves  moisture  holding capacity, serves  as an energy source for soil
 organisms, and increases the nutrient holding capacity (particularly of nitrogen and phosphorus) of
 the soil. Further, quantification of carbon, in conjunction with total N and S, provides insight about
 the potential for uptake or release of N and/or S by the soil organic matter due to microbial activity
 (Blume et al.,  1990).  Therefore, the measurement of organic carbon iin the soil is suggested for
 terrestrial monitoring programs, such as LRTAP.

      In addition to humus (and considered "organic" because of their origin) are several highly-
 condensed, nearly-elemental forms of C, such as  charcoal  and graphite.  These  may form  a
 significant portion of the total organic C present in soils with a history olF frequent fires. In contrast
 to humus, these highly-condensed forms are relatively inert. Thus, it is desirable to discriminate not
 only between mineral and organic C» but between  the readily oxidizable and inert organic C forms.

      The mineral and inert carbon forms are indistinguishable from the organic carbon forms using
 the total carbon procedure presented in Chapter 9. Thus, this method is presented to address the
 determination  of organic C in  soils where carbonates  or noticeable quantities of charcoal are
 present. In most acid soils, however, the determination of carbon cam be made using either this
 method or the total carbon method presented in Chapter 9.          j
Review of Methods

     There are a number of approaches to the determination of organic C in soil:   (1)  as the
difference between total (i.e. all forms) C and the mineral (chiefly carbonate) forms present, (2) by
determining total C after removing inorganic C by acid treatment, (3) by dry combustion (in a muffle
furnace at moderate temperature) with the organic content expressed ais weight "loss-on-ignition",
and (4) by organic matter reduction of Cr2O72" and the  subsequent titrirnetric determination of the
unreacted Cr2O7^ by ferrous sulphate. The first three  methods estimate total organic C, without
discrimination between humus and elementary C.  Further, the first two methods require specialized
equipment. Loss-on-ignition, while straightforward and acceptable for descriptive purposes, may
provide over-estimate  of reactive organic materials in soils of high charcoal content, or in certain
clay soils where weight loss may be associated with loss of water or hydroxyl groups.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
8
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 8
     Schollenberger (1927) introduced a rapid titrimetric method whereby soil organic matter is
oxidized by a saturated solution of potassium dichromate in concentrated sulphuric acid with
application of heat.  The unreduced chromic acid is then back-titrated with ferrous ammonium
sulphate solution.  Walkley and Black (1934) and later Walkley (1947) modified this by omitting the
heating step, utilizing only the heat of dilution of H2SO4 with water. The procedure is  about 75%
effective in recovering organic C with the exact figure varying somewhat with the soil. Walkley and
Black (1934) found a mean recovery of 76% for a range of British and foreign soils, necessitating
a multiplying factor of 1.32 to yield a result equivalent to organic C by combustion methods. Allison
(1960)  and others, however, suggested a much broader range varying with soil group.  In the
absence of a specific value, however, the original Walkley-Black (1934) value (76%) is frequently
used.  The original Wajkley-Black procedure has been modified by a number of authors.  Readily
available manuals, all giving variants of the "Walkley-Black" method include: Metson (1956), Jackson
(1958), Allison (1965), McKeague (1978), Nelson and Sommers (1982), Heffernan (1985), and Kalra and
Maynard (1991).
Reference Method

     The following procedure is that presented by Walkley (1947) with minor wording changes only.
Ferrous ammonium sulphate [FetNHJ^SO^'eHjX)) may be substituted for ferrous sulphate; ortho-
phenanthroline ferrous complex ("Ferroin"), instead of diphenylamine, may be used as the indicator.

Summary of Method

     A sample is oxidized with 1 N_ potassium dichromate and concentrated sulphuric acid.  After
20 to 30 minutes, the reaction is halted by dilution with water. Phosphoric acid and diphenylamine
indicator are added to the solution. The excess dichromate is potentiometrically back-titrated with
ferrous sulphate.  A blank is carried throughout the procedure  to standardize the ferrous sulfate
solution. Percent organic C is reported on an oven-dry soil basis.

Interferences and Shortcomings

     Chloride (Cr), if present in substantial quantity, interferes with the Walkley-Black procedure
through the formation of chromyl chloride (CrOjCy. Where problematic, the soil can be leached free
of Cr before analysis (Schollenberger, 1945).  Alternatively, the  CI" can be precipitated as AgCI by
the use of H^O4 containing 25 g Ag2SO4 per L in the digestion.  A correction factor  equal to one-
twelfth of the  Cr content may also be used in soils with a CI:C ratio up to 5:1 (Walkley 1935,1947;
Jackson, 1958; Nelson and Sommers,  1982).

     Nitrate (NO3') interferes only if the ratio of C to NO3' is toss than 20:1 (Heffernan, 1985; Kalra
and Maynard, 1991).

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
8
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 8
      While higher oxides of manganese (principally MnO2, but also Mn2O3 and Mn3OJ present a
potential interference, it would appear that only freshly-precipitated MnOa is capable of competing
with Cr2O7 for oxidizable substances. Thus, MnO2 interference can be generally discounted in most
soils (Walkley,  1947; Allison, 1965; Nelson and Sommers, 1982).  If, however, large quantities of
reactive Mn oxides were to be encountered their effect can be nullified by pretreatment with FeSO
(Walkley,  1947;  Jackson, 1958).

      Ferrous iron (Fez+), if present, is oxidized to Fe3* by Cr2O7* leading to a high result. However,
thorough air-drying of even highly-reduced soils before analysis is sufficient to convert the Fe2* to
Fe3+ and negate the effect (Walkley, 1947; Jackson, 1958; Nelson and Stammers, 1982). The amount
of Fe2+ present in well-aerated soils is so small that its effect can be neglected. Iron or steel
equipment should be avoided because of the possibility of introducing reducing material in the form
of metallic Fe (Jackson, 1958; Allison, 1965; Nelson and Sommers, 1982;  Heffernan, 1985).

Safety

      All operations should be carried out in well-ventilated conditions. Protective clothing including
eye protection  should be worn  at all  times, and especially when handling concentrated  acids.
Special care  must  be taken when adding  water to concentrated H2SO4.   Oiphenylamine has
carcinogenic properties and should be handled with extreme caution. Gloves and a respirator should
be worn when preparing the indicator solution.
Apparatus and Equipment

     • flasks, Erlenmeyer, 500 mL

     • dispenser, capable of accurately dispensing 25 mL

     • shaker, reciprocating, Eberbach or equivalent.

     • burette, 100 mL

     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.


Reagents  and Consumable Materials

     • sulphuric acid, H2SO4, concentrated, reagent grade (not less tfian 96%).

     • phosphoric acid, H3PO4, concentrated, reagent grade.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
8
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 Of 8
     • water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
       I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • diphenylamine indicator-To 0.5 g of indicator powder, add 20 ml_ water and 100 ml cone.
       potassium dichromate solution, KgCr^, 1.0 {*-In a one litre volumetric flask, dissolve
       49.04 g Ks,Cr2O7 in DI water.  Dilute to volume with DI wateir.

       ferrous sulphate solution, 1 N~In a one litre volumetric flask, dissolve 278.0-g of FeSO4»7H2O
       in DI water. Add 15 mL cone. H2SO4. Dilute to volume  with DI water.
Calibration and Standardization

     Standardization  of the FeSO4«7H2O is required for the accurate determination of organic
carbon contents.  Standardization is  performed using the method blank.   Normality of the
standardized ferrous sulphate solution is calculated using the formula presented in the 'Calculations
and Reporting* section.  Calibration standards should be prepared in the extraction solution.
Procedure

Step 1 -    Grind sufficient soil for convenient sampling to pass a 0.5-mm screen, avoiding mortars
           of steel or iron.  Transfer a weighed quantity, not exceeding 10 g and containing about
           10 to 25 mg of organic carbon, to a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask.

Step 2 -    Add 10 mL of 1.0 N Kj,Cr2O7 solution and swirl flask gently to disperse soil in the solution.

Step 3 -    Rapidly add 20 mL of concentrated H2SO4.

Step 4 -    Immediately shake the flask once or twice and allow it to stand for 20 to 30 minutes.

Step 5 -    Add 200 to 300 mL DI water, 10 mL of concentrated H3PO4, and 1 mL diphenylamine
           indicator solution.

Step 6 -    Run in 1.0  N FeSO4«7H2O solution from a burette until the solution is  purple or blue.

Step 7 -    Continue adding 1.0 N FeSO4«7H2O solution in portions of about 0.5 mL until the colour
           flashes to green, which it does with  little or no warning.

Step 8 -    Add 0.5 mL 1.0 N K^O, solution and complete the titration by adding  1.0 £ FeSO4»7H2O
           solution dropwise until the last trace  of blue disappears.  Record volume of titrant used.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date::
                                                              Page:
8
2.1
May 22,1995
5 of 8
 Quality Control

 Precision

      One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples.  To eliminate bias
 due to position in the run. the routine sample duplicate should be analyzed separately within the
 analytical run.   Within-run precision  is determined from duplicates  based on relative percent
 difference between the samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD £ 10%.

 Accuracy

      Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
 for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the accuracy
 windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

 Method Blanks

      One method blank, carried through the extraction procedure, are analyzed with each batch of
 thirty samples to determine the exact normality of the FeSO4»7H2O solution.

 Quality Control Preparation Sample

      A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
 per analytical run. This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision.
 Accuracy of the QCPS should be  within ± 10% of the long-term mean.  Between-run precision can
 be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard deviation.
 If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard
 deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.

 Quality Control Check Standard
                                                               I
      A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
 samples, and after the last sample of each analytical  run. The QCCS should contain all the analytes
of interest with mid-calibration range concentrations. Quantified values of the QCCS should be
within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

      It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias  and other potential problems. If
analyzed values  deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard deviations, the
instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior  to any further sample analyses.

-------
                                                           Chapter:     8
                                                           Version:     2.1
                                                           Date:        May 22, 1995
                                                           Page:        6 of 8
 Suggested Run Format

 QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
 QCCS. Samples 9 to 16, DUP,
 QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
 QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, QCCS.

       where:   QCCS = quality control check standard
               MB    - method blank
               QCPS  = quality control preparation sample
               DUP   = duplicate sample
               SRM   = standard reference material
Calculations and Reporting

     The following calculations assume that a total of 10.5 mL K.,Cr2O7 solution is used and that
the recovery is greater than 75%.  If a soil-specific recovery other than 75% is identified, then that
factor should be used. If the results are to be expressed in terms of "readily oxidizable organic C",
the recovery factor is omitted (Jackson 1958).
                       1 mL 1.0 N KgC^Oy is equivalent to 0.003 g C.

(1)   Determine exact normality of FeSO4«7H2O solution from the method blank as follows:

               Normality of FeSO4-7H2O =  _ 10.5 __
                                         mL FeSO4«7H2O used
(2)   Determine volume of K^Cv reduced as follows:

       mL KjCr^ Reduced  = mL 1 N 1^Cr2O7 used - (mL FeSO4«7H2O x N FeSO4«7H2O)
(3)   Calculate "total organic C" (%) as follows (the calculation assumes that the oxidation is 76%
     efficient)
                    Total Organic C %  =  (mL tC.Cr.py reduced) x 0.395
                                                weight (g)

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               P'age:
8
2.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 8
 (4)   Alternatively, assuming the soil organic matterorganic C ratio to be 1.724, the results may be
      expressed as "total organic matter* (OM)
                         Total OM% m (ml K.Cr.OJ reduced x Q.eifll
                                                  weight (g)

 (5)   Alternatively, the results may be expressed as "readily oxidizable organic C" (the calculation
      omits recovery factor)                                      !
                 Readily Oxidizable Organic C % =  fmL tCCr.O, reduced! x 0.3
                                                          weight (g)


 (6)   Alternatively, the results may be expressed as "readily oxidizabla organic matter".
                   Readily Oxidizable OM % =  fmL ICCr,OTl reduced x 0.517
                                                       weight (g)
 References
                                                                i
 Allison, LE. 1960. Wet combustion apparatus and procedure for organic and inorganic carbon in soil
      Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 24:36-40.

 Allison, LE. 1965. Organic carbon, pp. 1367-1378 In C.A. Black (ed), Methods of soil analysis. Part
      2. Chemical and microbiological properties.  Am. Soc. Agron., Agron. No. 9.

 American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.01,
      Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia,
      Pennsylvania.

 Heffernan, B. 1985. A handbook of methods of inorganic chemical analysis for forest soils, foliage
      and water. CSIRO, Canberra, 281 pp.

Jackson, M.L  1958. Soil chemical analysis. Prentice-Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. pp. 498.

Kalra, Y.P., and D.G. Maynard. 1991. Methods for forest soil and plant analysis. Forest. Can. Inf Rep
     Nor-x-319. pp. 116.

-------
                                                               Chapter:     8
                                                               Version:     2.1
                                                               Date:        May 22,1995
                                                               Page:       8 of 8


McKeague, JA (ed.) 1978. Manual on soil sampling and methods of analysis, 2nd ed. Can. Soc. Soil
     Sci. Ottawa, pp. 212.                                   .

Metson, A.J. 1956. Methods of chemical analysis for soil survey. N.Z Dep. Sci. Ind. Res. Soil Bur.
     Bull. 12. pp. 208.

Nelson, D.W., and LE. Sommers. 1982. Total carbon, organic carbon, and organic matter. In A.L
     Page, R.H. Miller, and D.R. Keeney (eds.). Methods of soil analysis. Part 2, 2nd ed. Agronomy
     9:539-580.

Schollenberger, C.J. 1927. A rapid approximate method for determining soil organic matter. Soil Sci.
     24:65-68.

Schollenberger, C.J. 1945. Determination of soil organic matter. Soil Sci. 59:53-56.

Walkley, A. 1935. An examination of methods or determining organic carbon and nitrogen in soils.
     J. Agrte. Sci. 25:598-609.

Walkley, A, 1947. A critical examination of a rapid method for determining organic carbon in soils -
     effect of variations in digestion conditions and of inorganic soil constituents. Soil Sci.
     63:251-263.

Walkley, A., and LA. Black. 1934. An examination of the Degtjareff method for determining soil
     organic  matter, and a proposed  modification of the chromic acid titration method. Soil Sci.
     37:29-38.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
9
1.1
May 22,1995
1of 7
                                      Total Carbon
 Introduction
      In soil, carbon occurs  in both  mineral and organic forms.   In soils affected  by acidic
 deposition, carbonate minerals (limestone and dolomite) are  generally lacking and thus, most C
 occurs in organic matter. As a result of this lack of inorganic carbon forms, total carbon analyses
 in eastern forest soils affected by acidic deposition are often referred to as total organic carbon
 (TOC) measurements.

      Organic carbon forms consist of plant, animal, and microbial remains in various stages of
 decomposition plus their highly-altered derivatives.  The latter are collectively referred to as humic
 matter or humus.  Humus maintains the physical condition, improves moisture holding capacity,
 serves as an  energy source for  soil organisms,  and  increases the  nutrient holding capacity
 (particularly of nitrogen and phosphorus) of the soil.  In addition to humius (and considered "organic"
 because of their origin) are several highly-condensed, nearly-elemental forms of C, such as charcoal
 and graphite. These nearly-elemental forms may compose a significant portion of the total organic
 C present in soils with a history of frequent fires.  In contrast to humus,, these highly-condensed
 forms are relatively inert in the soil.

      Total carbon is the sum  of all inorganic and organic forms of carbon in the soil (Nelson and
 Sommers. 1982).  Quantification of total C, in conjunction with total N aind S, provides insight about
 the potential for uptake or release of N and/or S by the soil organic matter due to microbial activity
 (Blume et al, 1990). The carbon content of a soil affects sulphate adsorption and cation exchange
 properties of the soil, and TC content is sometimes used for certain soil taxonomic classifications
 such as the determination of a mollic (and thus, Mollisols) and histic epipadons (Soil Survey Staff,
 1975). Therefore, the measurement of total carbon in the soil is suggested for terrestrial monitoring
 programs, such as LRTAP.
Review of Methods

     Total carbon determinations for soil involve the conversion of all forms of C to CO2 by either
dry combustion or wet digestion techniques.  The evolved CO2 is then quantified by gravimetric,
titrimetric, volumetric, manometric, spectrophotometric, or gas chromatographic techniques (Nelson
and Sommers, 1982).
                                                                !

     Direct analysis of the sample may be done by combustion of the  sample  at elevated
temperatures (generally at 1000° C or higher; 1300° C is optimal for the completion destruction of
calcium carbonate) and  measuring the  liberated  CO2 by an infrared or thermal conductivity
spectroscopy.  Combustion is performed in a resistance  furnace or an induction furnace in the
presence of a stream of oxygen or CO2-free air.  Various catalyst or accelerators may be used to

-------
                                                             Chapter:    9
                                                             Version:     1.1
                                                             Date:       May 22, 1995
                                                             Page:       2 of 7


ensure complete combustion of all carbon forms.  Dry combustion procedures using either high-
temperature  (approximately 1500°  C) or  induction furnaces are  most  commonly  found  in
commercially-available automated total C analyzers  (Nelson and Sommers, 1982).  Examples  of
Instruments that combust the sample include the LEGO CHN analyzers and Carla-Erba C and N
analyzers.  These methods require little or no sample preparation for the determination of totafC.

     The wet digestion analysis of soils for total C by chromic acid digestion has long been a
standard method giving good agreement with the dry combustion techniques (Nelson and Sommers,
1982).  Schollenberger (1927) introduced a rapid titrimetric method whereby soil organic matter is
oxidized  by a saturated solution of potassium dichromate in concentrated sulphuric acid with
application of heat.  The unreduced chromic acid is then back-titrated with ferrous ammonium
sulphate solution.  Walkley and Black (1934) and later Walkley (1947) modified this by omitting the
heating step, utilizing only the heat of dilution of H2SO4 with water.  The procedure  is about three-
quarters effective in recovering  organic C wjth the exact figure varying somewhat with the soil.
Walkley and Black (1934) found a mean recovery of 76% for a range of British and foreign soils,
necessitating a multiplying factor of 1.32 to yield a result equivalent to organic C by combustion
methods.  Allison (1960) and others, however, suggested a much broader range varying with soil
group. Alternately, wet combustion may be carried out in a Van-Slyke-Neil apparatus and evolved
CO2 estimated by manometric procedures (Bremner, 1949; Nelson and Sommers, 1982). However,
it should be noted that these methods are only comparable to the dry combustion techniques in
soils in which no carbonates or inert forms of carbon (e.g., charcoal or graphite) are present.


 Reference Method

      The reference method for total C in soils is dry combustion in a carbon analyzer with either
infrared or thermal conductivity detection.  The analysis of total C employing this technique has been
chosen as a reference method because it is widely used in North America and has been used
successfully by some laboratories for both soil and foliage samples.

 Summary of Method

      A soil sample is oxidized at temperatures  greater than 1000° C (1300°C  preferred) with
 catalysts as specified by the instrument manufacturer. The evolved CO2 is then quantified by either
 infrared or thermal conductivity detection.  Percent total C is reported on  an  oven-dry soil basis.
 Depending on the type of instrument  present in the laboratory, total N and H can also  be
 simultaneously quantified from the same sample aliquot using this technique.

 Interferences and Shortcomings

      Although moisture can interfere with certain carbon-hydrogen-nitrogen (CHN) analyses by
 producing large responses for total H, this interference can be eliminated in elemental analyses with
 moisture traps.  Drying can cause losses of volatile organic materials containing C and  N, and

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
9
1.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 7
decomposition and loss of certain carbonates and ammonium salts.  Samples may be freeze-dried
to minimize these losses if approved by the quality assurance (QA) manager.

     Ambient N2 and CO2 not associated with the sample present possible gaseous interferences.
Care must be taken with the blank to hold N2 and CO2 below the required instrument detection limit.
The use of high purity carrier gas or helium traps helps reduce CO2 contamination.

     Soil residue can accumulate at the top of the combustion column.  The column should be
cleaned if sufficient residue accumulates that analytical results are affected.

Safety

     Normal safety precautions should be taken when using high-temperature combustion furnaces.

     Protective clothing and safety glasses should be worn when handling reagents. Heat resistant
gloves  may be needed when  placing  samples in the furnace.  The  Furnace must be adequately
vented  and protected from human contact and combustible materials.  Gas cylinders should be
bolted or chained in an upright position.
Apparatus and Equipment

     • carbon analyzer with infrared detector, Carlo-Erba model 1500, or equivalent.
                                                             i
     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.

     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.
Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • oxygen, high purity.                                      i

     • compressed air, if needed,

     • catalysts and  combustion  accelerators, vanadium pentoxidle or as recommended  by
       instrument manufacturer.

     • absorbents, as needed.

     • vials, crucibles, boats/or tin sample capsules, as required by instrument.

-------
                                                            Chapter:    9
                                                            Version:     1.1
                                                            Date:       May 22, 1995
                                                            Page:       4 of °7
Calibration and Standardization

     Set up the instrument according to the  instrument manufacturer's  instructions regarding
calibration and standardization. In general, the instrument should be calibrated at least once a day
or once per batch of samples, whichever is more frequent. Use either NIST (formerly NBS) reference
materials or standards  supplied by the manufacturer and  approved  by the  laboratory or QA
manager. The concentration range of the standards must be representative of the C concentrations
expected in the soil samples. A minimum of a two-point calibration curve should be used.  Use of
a NIST standard reference material as an initial calibration check Is highly recommended.
Procedure

Step 1 -   Weigh out 100 mg of air-dried mineral soil or 20 mg of organic soils into appropriate
          sample holder.  Record sample weight.

Step 2 -   Perform sample analysis following manufacturer's instructions.

Step 3-   Take carbon measurement reading (in counts).


Quality Control

Precision

      One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To eliminate bias
due to position in the run, the routine sample duplicate should be analyzed separately within the
analytical run.   Within-run precision is  determined  from duplicates based on  relative percent
difference between the'samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD s; 10%.

Accuracy

      Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the accuracy
windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

 Method Blanks

      Three method blanks, containing all accelerators or catalysts used in routine sample analysis
In their appropriate proportions, should be carried through the combustion procedure with  each
batch of samples to measure potential contamination.   Method blanks should be run at the

-------
                                                             Chapter:     9
                                                             Version:     1.1
                                                             Date:        May 22,1995
                                                             Page:        5 of 7


 beginning, middle, and end of each analytical run.  The concentration of «ach blank should be less
 than or equal to the instrument detection limit. Ail results should be blank corrected using the mean
 of the acceptable method blank readings.

 Quality Control Preparation Sample                      j

      A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
 per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision.
 Accuracy of the QCPS should be within ± 10% of the long-term mean.  Between-run precision can
 be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard deviation.
 If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard
 deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.

 Quality Control Check Standard

      A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
 samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. The QCCS should contain all the analytes
 of interest with mid-calibration range concentrations.  Quantified values of the QCCS should be
 within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.           I

      It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
 so that control  charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems. If
 analyzed values deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard deviations, the
 instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

 Suggested Run Format

 QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,                               i
 QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, DUP,                                   ;
 QCCS, Samples 16 to 25,  SRM,                                 '!
 QCCS, Samples 26 to 30,  QCCS.
                                   "             "             ,i
       where:  QCCS  = quality control  check standard
               MB    = method blank
               QCPS  = quality control  preparation sample       i
               OUP   = duplicate sample                         '
               SRM   = standard reference material
Calculations and Reporting

     Each laboratory should consult the manufacturer's instruction manual for the determination
of the appropriate formulae to be used in the calculation of total C.

-------
                                                               Chapter:    9
                                                               Version:     1.1
                                                               Date:       May 22, 1995
                                                               Page:       6 of 7


      For some total C analyzers, % C can be read directly from the instrument. The sample weight,
 as different from the standard, is taken into account on some instruments.

      Results are reported to two significant figures. Results are read to the nearest 0.01%. Results
 should be blank and moisture corrected.

      In general, the total organic carbon (assuming the lack of or negligible quantities inorganic
 carbonates in the soil) may be calculated as follows:

                  C (wt %) = (instrument reading - blank)  x instrument factor  .
                                (sample weight (g) x moisture correction)

      NOTE: The moisture correction factor is as follows:

                [(1 - moisture content in %) + (100 + moisture  content in %)]


 References

 Allison, LE. 1960. Wet combustion apparatus and procedure for organic and inorganic carbon in soil.
      Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 24:36-40.

 Blume,  LJ., BA Schumacher, P.W. Shaffer, K.A. Cappo, M.L Papp, R.D. van Remortel, D.S. Coffey,
      M.G. Johnson, and  D.J. Chaloud. 1990. Handbook of  methods for acid deposition studies:
      Laboratory  analyses for soil chemistry. EPA/600/4-90/023. U.S.  Environmental  Protection
      Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Las Vegas, NV.

 Nelson, D.W., and LE. Sommers. 1982. Total carbon, organic carbon, and organic matter. In A.L
      Page, R.H. Miller, and D.R. Keeney (eds.). Methods of soil analysis. Part 2. 2nd ed  Agronomy
      9:539-580.

Scholtenberger, C.J. 1927. A rapid approximate method for determining soil organic matter. Soil Sci.
      24:65-68.

Soil Survey Staff. 1975. Soil taxonomy: A basic system of soil classification for making and
      interpreting soil surveys.  USDA-SCS Agric. Handb. 436. U.S. Gov. Print. Office, Washington,
      DC.

Walkley, A. 1947. A critical examination of a rapid method for determining organic carbon in soils -
      effect of variations in digestion conditions and of inorganic soil constituents. Soil Sci.
      63:251-263.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
1.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 7
Walkley, A., and IA Black. 1934. An examination of the Degtjareff method for determining soil
     organic matter, and a proposed modification of the chromic acid titration method. Soil Sci.
     37:29-38.

-------
                                                             Chapter:     10
                                                             Version:     2.1
                                                             Date:        May 22,1995
                                                             Page:       1 of 5



                                   Total Nitrogen

Introduction

     Nitrogen is  one of the five major constituents of living  matter.  As such, its  form and
concentration  are of  major  interest  when  dealing with the growth of terrestrial and aquatic
organisms. In nature, nitrogen is found in a number of forms, all of which are interconvertible given
the correct chemical and microbiological conditions.  Soil N accounts for only a small fraction of N
in the lithosphere, and of this fraction, only a very small proportion is directly available to plants
since greater than 90% of the N is in the organic form. Plants obtain most of their N from inorganic
ions, NOa and NH4+, that comprise less than 1% of the total N.

     Atmospheric deposition of NOX can directly affect the total soil N concentrations. Further, soil
N content changes may be brought about by indirect effects to the forest ecosystem, such as a
result of acid deposition.  Therefore, the measurement of total soil N is  suggested for long-term
terrestrial monitoring programs, such as LRTAP. Nitrate and ammonium levels in soils are usually
negligible and the spatial and temporal variability associated with these parameters is much greater
than for total N.


Review of Methods

     Total N in soil is usually measured by either a wet oxidation (Kjeldahl method) or dry oxidation
(Dumas method) procedure (Bremner and Mulvaney, 1982). Considerable modifications have been
proposed for  these  methods (e.g., Nelson  and  Sommers,  1980).  More recently,  near infrared
reflectance spectroscopy (NIRS)  and LECO combustion have been used as  alternatives to  the
conventional chemical analysis for total N determination.  However, these are not in widespread use
and involve expensive equipment. Thus, the chemical wet oxidation techniques  remain the most
frequently used.

     The principle of the Kjeldahl and Dumas techniques have been thoroughly discussed in several
reviews (Bremner, 1965; Nelson and  Sommers, 1980; Bremner and Mulvaney,  1982). The Dumas
methods do not quantitatively recover many nitrogenous compounds (e.g., heterocyclic compounds)
and the automated N analyzer based on the Dumas method has not been widely used (Bremner and
Mulvaney, 1982).  The Kjeldahl procedure is more commonly used and modifications of the original
Kjeldahl methods have extended the scope of the procedure. The total Kjeldahl N method involves
the digestion of the sample with H2S04 to convert organic N to NH/-N followed  by distillation of the
digest with strong alkali to liberate NH3. Various modifications to the distillation and measurement
of the liberated NH, have been proposed. In addition, various methods for the direct measurement
of  NH/ in the Kjeldahl digests have also been used.  Highly refractory organic  N compounds or
compounds containing N-N or N-O linkages are not  completely recovered by the Kjeldahl digestion
 (Bremner and Mulvaney, 1982).  However, in most soils, little of the available N is in the refractory
form.   Similarly, NO,-N and NO2-N are not adequately recovered but are not usually  present in
 significant amounts in undisturbed forest soils.


 Reference Method

      The reference method uses the Kjeldahl acid digestion in the presence  of a catalyst which
 converts organic nitrogen to inorganic ammonium.  The measurement of N is  done using alkaline
 distillation to liberate NH3 which is measured by acid titration.  The digestion  is  carried out either
 on a hot plate or in an aluminum digestion block.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
10
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 5
Summary of Method

     Soil samples are digested by the regular Kjeldahl technique using a K^O4-CuSO4 catalyst in
an aluminum block digestor with internal heaters and temperature conltrol. Determination of NH/-N
is done by an automated system (Tecator Kjeltec 1030) determining MH, liberated by distillation of
the digest with 40% NaOH. The NH3 is absorbed in unstandardized H3BO3 and ammonium borate
is formed. The borate is titrated back to H3BO3 using a standard strong acid (HCI).

Interferences
                                                             i
     After digestion, samples must not be allowed to cool in the digestion block as NH3 will be lost
from the (NH4)2SO4 formed by the digestion.                      !

Safety

     Protective clothing  and safety glasses should be worn when handling strong acids.  The
digestion blocks should be located in the fume hood and,  if  possible, the temperature controller
should be located outside the fume  hood.  The equipment should not be left unattended.  The
preparation of the NaOH should also be done in the fume hood. The NaOH pellets should be added
very slowly to the water and in very small portions due to the intense exothermic reaction that
occurs.
Apparatus and Equipment

     • digestion block, 20 place, Tecator System 20 1050 or equivalent, with programmable
       temperature controller.
                                                             l
     • distillation and titration apparatus, Kjeltec Auto 1030 Analyzer or equivalent.

     * glass digestion tubes (295 mm x 40 mm), 250 mL to fit block, apiaropriate to sample and
       solution volume used.

     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.


Reagents and Consumable Materials              \

     • sulphuric  acid,  HjSO^ concentrated, reagent grade (96%).
     • water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to A8TWI specifications for Type
       I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).                      ,
                                                             !
     • catalyst, Kjeltab tablets or equivalent. Each tablet contains 35 g JC,SO4 and 0.4 g CuSO4.

     • hydrochloric acid, HCI, standard acid 0.01 M.                |

     • boric acid, H3BO3, reagent grade powder.                  \
                                                             \
     • ammonium chloride, NH4CI, reagent grade powder.

     • methanol, reagent grade.

-------
                                                             Chapter:     10
                                                             Version:      2.1
                                                             Date:        May 22, 1995 •
                                                             Page:        3 of 5

      • sodium hydroxide, NaOH, reagent grade pellets.
      • sodium hydroxide solution, 40%~Dissolve 10 kg of NaOH in 15 L DI water.
      • bromocresol green.
      • bromocresol green solution-In a 100 ml_ volumetric flask dissolve 0.100 g bromocresol green
       in methanol. Dilute to volume with methanol.
      • methyl red.
      • methyl red solution-In a 100 ml_ volumetric flask dissolve 0.100 g methyl -red in methanol.
       Dilute to volume with methanol.
      • receiving solution (Tecator, 1985)-Dissolve 100 g H3BO, in DI water and dilute to 10 L.  Add
       100 mL bromocresol green solution.  Add 70 ml_ methyl  red solution.  Add  5 ml_ of  40%
       NaOH solution.
      • recovery check solution, 5,000 mg-N/L-In a one litre volumetric flask dissolve 19.0927  g
       NH4CI in DI  water.  Dilute to volume.

Calibration and Standardization
      Before analyzing the digested samples, distilled water  blanks are run on the Kjeltec 1030
Analyzer until a constant reading of HCI is  obtained. A 5 mL aliquot of a recovery check solution
containing 5,000 mg-N/L is analyzed to check the recovery. Recovery should be within ± 10%.

Procedure
Step 1 -   Weigh 0.250 g of organic horizons, 0.500 g of Ah horizons (60 mesh), or  1 to 2.00  g of
          mineral soil (60 mesh) into a digestion tube.
Step 2 -   Add 10 mL concentrated H2SO4 to  the tube and mix by swirling.
          Note: This step should be carried out in a fume hood.
Step 3 -   Heat tubes at 200° C in the digestion block until very black (approx. 30 minutes).
Step 4 -   Add one  catalyst tablet (Kjeltab).
Step 5 -   Heat tubes at 200° C for 15-20 minutes until the Kjeltab dissolves.
Step 6 -   Increase the block temperature  to 300° C and heat for 30 minutes.
Step 7 -   Raise the temperature to 425°  C and heat tubes  until the sample turns a turquoise
          green. Digest samples for 20 minutes.
Step 8 -   Remove the digestion tubes from the block and allow to cool for about 5 minutes.
          Note:  Do not allow to cool in the heating block as NH3 from the (NHJj.SO* formed by
          digestion will be lost if heated.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
10
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 5
 Step 9 -   Add approximately 30 mL DI water and mix well until sample is in solution.

 Step 10 -  Dilute to approximately 100 mL with DI water.

 Step 11 -  Follow instructions for the operation of the Kjeltec Auto 1030 Analyzer (locator, 1985).

 Step 12-  Set the alkali pump to deliver 25-30 mL of 40% NaOH.
 Step 13 -  Titrate the sample with 0.01 M HCI.                   I
                                                             i

 Quality Control

 Precision
                 StloUrld ^ ana|y*!d in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To eliminate bias
          «       £ run< the r?u ine  sample duP|icat«» should be analyzed separately within the
          EL*'   Wlltin'run Photon is  determined from duplicates based  on relative percent
difference between the samples at an  acceptance limit of a RPD x 10%.         ""-»» percent

Accuracy

      Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM)  Acceptable limits
                   11!*10? fr°m the kn°Wn concentrati°n °f the standard or witSe TaS;uScy
                  * th8 refe/en€e matuerial manufacturer, whichever is larger. It is recommended
      ™. more accuracy standards be prepared with each batch of samples. These provide a
check on total between-run precision (digestion and distillation/titration).              I»OVK» a

Method Blanks
                  1313 *-kS> ?arr'8d thr°U9h the extraction Procedure, are analyzed with each batch
               M     f to measure potential contamination.  Method blanks should be run at
     h       mid?e> u "^ end of eacn ana|ytica' r"n- The concentration of each blank should be
less than or equal to the instrument detection limit.                                 ««uiu o«

Quality Control Preparation Sample

      il!!?tri? matc!2?d ir»-nouse quality control preparation sample (QCP8) should be analyzed once
       *   'orS8 2an)ft is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run pTeciston
             lQCPSt S-h°Uld. ^ Within * 10% of the Ion9-term mean.  EJetween-run precision can
             5Y ana|yan9 the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard deviation
           hd °nKa ^"l01 ^ de,viate from the "ortfl-tarm mean by more than three standard
         , the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps
Quality Control Check Standard
       q  2* ^"V? ?*?k standard (QCCS) sh°"ld be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
            *l"riS' 'rS !ampl8 °f each ana|ytical run- The QCCS should contain all the analytes
            ?*umidlcallbratlon range concentrations.  Quantified values of the QCCS should be
      ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
                                               10
                                               2.1
                                               May 22, 1995
                                               5 of 5
     It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems.  If
analyzed values deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard deviations, the
instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

Suggested Run Format

QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.
       where:  QCCS
               MB
               QCPS
               DUP
               SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
 Calculations and Reporting
formula:
       Report total N as percentage on a dry-weight basis to the nearest 0.01% using the following
                        N % = (mL sample - mL blank) x N x 1.401
                                     weight (g) of dry soil
       where: N= normality of HCI titrant solution.
 References

 American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.01,
      Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia,
      Pennsylvania.

 Bremner, J.M. 1965. Organic nitrogen in soil. In Bartholomew W.V., and F.E. Clark (ed.) Soil nitrogen.
      Agronomy 10. Am. Soc. Agron., Madison, WI. p. 93-149.

 Bremner, J.M., and C.S. Mulvaney. 1982. Nitrogen-total. In Page, LA et al. (ed.) Methods of soil
      analysis. Agronomy 9. Am. Soc. Agron., Madison WI. p. 595-624.

 Nelson, D.W.,  and LE. Sommers. 1980. Total nitrogen analysis for soil and plant tissues. J. Assoc.
      Off. Anal. Chem. 63:770-780.

 Tecator. 1985. Kjeltec Auto 1030 Analyzer Manual. Tecator, AB. Hoganas, Sweden. 43p.

-------
                                                               Chaprter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
11
2.1
May 22, 1995
1of 7
                              Extract able Phosphorus
 Introduction
      Phosphorus (P) is an essential nutrient for plant growth and is required in relatively large
 quantities by plants. It is essential for energy transfer reactions within all cells and is a constituent
 of many proteins, nucleic acids, and coenzymes.  Information on the phosphorus status of soils has
 long been regarded as being very important to the proper management of soils for agricultural
 purposes. More recently, it has become recognized as important in forest management as  well.
 Trie availability of P to plants is influenced by soil pH. Phosphorus is most available to plants at
 a soil pH of 6 to 7. At pH lower than 6, P becomes fixed in iron and aluminum compounds, and, at
 pH above 7, calcium phosphates precipitate to an extent which limits P availability.
                                                                i          *
      From the above discussion, it can be seen that soil acidification resulting from atmospheric
 deposition can influence the availability of P to plant species. Since P is an important macronutrient
 for plants upon  which growth rates and general health depend, it should be monitored as a
 parameter for terrestrial monitoring programs.                     ,


 Review of Methods

 Extractants                                                  i

      Phosphorus is of concern largely in relation to its role in plant growth and, therefore, methods
 for extracting soil P should best reflect the plant's ability to extract P from the soil. Standardizing
 methods is difficult because the effectiveness of an extractant depends on soil type.

      Many extractants have been used to extract plant available P.  The most common, and perhaps
 the ones which best correlate with plant P uptake, are NaHCOJNaOH (Olsen) and NH4F/HCI (Bray
 methods). The Olsen method is widely used  on soils with high base status.  The extractant
 decreases the amount of Ca in  solution by causing precipitation of CaCO,  resulting  in the
 dissolution of calcium phosphates. It also may remove some of the less strongly bound P from Al
 compounds.  Since the method does not remove strongly bound  P from Al and Fe oxides, the P
 levels obtained from acidic  soils can be very low, often below detectable limits. The Bray method
 is more appropriate on acidic soils. The combination of HCI and NH4F removes readily acid soluble
 P forms, including Ca-phosphates.  The NH4F dissolves Fe- and Al-phosphates which are prevalent
 in acid soils. In calcareous soils, CaCO3 rapidly neutralizes the acid (Randall and Grava, 1971),  and
 low estimates of available P result. Also, insoluble compounds may form as a result of reactions
 of CaFa with P (Smillie and  Syers, 1972).

     The objective of most extractions is to approximate the relative amount of P that may be
 available for plant growth, therefore, it is logical to use extractants which are similar to those within
the rhizosphere, such as root exudates. Organic ions, such as oxalate, malate, citrate, and acetate,
 would be appropriate for such use.  These extractants have not been extensively used for  soil
testing, but have been used in research and  were  found to be effective extractants (Lopez-
Hernandez et al., 1986; Ball and Williams, 1968).  Holford and Callis (1985b) found a combination of
ammonium lactate-acetic acid to be a superior method for gauging plaint response to soil P levels
than other methods, including Bray 1, Bray 2, and NaHCO3, on moderately acid and alkaline soils in
Australia.  On acidic  soils neutral fluoride extractants and 0.01 M sulphuric acid were better
indicators of response than ammonium lactate-acetic acid.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
11
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 7
Extraction Methods

     When  choosing an  extraction method, it is  necessary to consider the purpose  of  the
measurements and the type of soils being monitored. Phosphorus availability to plants, particularly
forest species,  is of primary concern when studying the terrestrial effects of acidic atmospheric
deposition.  Detrimental effects would be  seen first on soils which are both sensitive to acid
deposition (low acid buffering, capacity) and which are already low in P.  Moderately acidic and
acidic brunisols and podzols meet these criteria and, therefore, the extractant chosen should be a
good indicator of plant-available P for these soils.  There must also be evidence available linking
extractable P levels to growth of tree species.  For these reasons, the Bray methods have been
chosen as means of determining extractable P for the terrestrial effects related to LRTAP studies.
Thomas and Peaslee (1973) describe NH4F-HCI (the Bray extractant) methods as being  appropriate
for soils with low to medium CEC that have been moderately to highly weathered, and Olsen and
Sommers (1982) state that the Bray method is most successful on acid soils.

     Numerous modifications to the originally described Bray method have been made  to suit local
conditions.   These  have resulted in considerable intralaboratory variation in  shaking times,
soihextractant ratios, and extractant concentrations.   In  general, the amount  of P extracted
increases with increased shaking time and  speed as well as with decreased soihsolution ratios.

     The Bray 2 method  increases the  concentration of HCI from 0.025 N to  0.10 N in order to
dissolve more Ca-phosphates. In acid and moderately acid soils, this does not appreciably improve
the correlation to plant uptake, and, for these soils the Bray 1 method is appropriate and is widely
used.  Due to the common use  of the Bray  1 method, and its  appropriateness for  acid  and
moderated acid soils it  is the method suggested for use in terrestrial effects studies.

     Olsen and Sommers (1982) suggest a 1:7 soihsolution ratio.  This ratio would appear to be
appropriate for acid and moderately acid soils, although lower ratios (i.e., 1:50) are more suited to
less acidic soils.  McKeague (1978) recommends a  soihsolution ratio of 1:10 (2.5 g soil  to 25 mL
solutfon). We also recommend the 1:10 ratio as it  will result in the extraction of slightly greater
amounts  of P, is more convenient, and will  still  correlate well with plant uptake of P.

     Shaking times vary  from  1 minute (Olsen and Sommers, 1982) to 30 minutes (Halford and
Cullis, 1985a).  Although more P is extracted with increased shaking times, Olsen and Sommers
(1982) and McKeague (1978) use a standard one minute shaking time.

Analysis  of Extract

      Phosphorus in the extracting solution has most often been measured by colorimetric methods.
Molybdate blue methods  are the most sensitive and common.  A phosphomolybdate complex is
reduced  to  give  a  blue  colour.   The  reducing agent  chosen depends  upon the solution P
concentration, the concentration of interfering substances, such as arsenates and silicates, and the
extracting solution.  Olsen and Sommers (1982) and Sheldrick (1984) recommend the use of SnC^
as a reducing agent for analysis of Bray extracts.  However, the coloured solution produced with
SnCI, is  only stable for  about 2  hours and must be mixed immediately before each analysis.
Furthermore, at  a fixed  concentration  of the reducing agent, the absorbance  degrades with
increasing P concentration. Additionally, the solution can produce precipitates and coat the flow cell.
The latter problem can be minimized by periodically cleaning the apparatus with acid (Smith and
Scott, 1983).

      Ascorbic acid as a reducing agent  has for the most part replaced SnCI2 in measurements and
was recommended by the Canada Soil Survey Committee (McKeague, 1978). The reagent is stable
for 24 hours and problems with precipitates are not encountered, however, it is not as sensitive as

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Paige:
11
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 7
SnCI2 because colour development is weaker. For soil monitoring programs, the sensitivity obtained
with ascorbic acid is more than adequate.  The ascorbic acid reduction method using ammonium
molybdate to* develop colour is, therefore, preferred for use in LRTAP monitoring programs.
Reference Method

     The reference method for the determination of extractable P from soil samples for terrestrial
effects of acid deposition is the use of 0.03 N NH4F + 0.025 N HCI as an extract solution (Bray 1)
followed by a cotorimetric analysis using ammonium molybdate with ascorbic acid as a reducing
agent.  Automated segmented flow cplourimetric systems are commonly used for the measurement
of P and curve calibration programs  used for determining the standard calibration curve.  The
procedure described here,  however, describes a manual method, keeping equipment costs to a
minimum.

Summary

     A 2.5 g soil sample is shaken with 25 mL of extracting solution for 1 min. The solution is then
filtered. Approximately 5 mL aliquot is transferred to a 25 mL volumetric; flask and the pH is reduced
to 5 using  HLSO4.  Ammonium molybdate reagent is added and the content of P is determined
colorimetricaily. The percent transmittance of the solution is read using a colorimeter. The Bray 1
P is reported in mg/kg.

Interferences and Shortcomings
                                                               •i
     Some labs add carbon black to assure a clear filtrate with less interference for colorimetric
determination of P.  Olsen and Sommers (1982) do not suggest the use of carbon black and suggest
extra filtration steps be used.

     For calcareous soils, a 1:50 soihextracting solution should be used.  Incomplete dissolution
of Ca-phosphates may still be observed such that a different method is required.

     Boric acid is sometimes used to eliminate possible interference firom fluorides.  However, the
routine use of boric acid in most soils has not been established.

Safety

     All operations should be carried out in well-ventilated conditions. Protective clothing including
eye protection should be worn at all times, and especially when handling  concentrated acids.
Special care must be taken when adding water to concentrated H2SO4. Use sodium bicarbonate and
water to neutralize  and dilute spilled acids.


Apparatus and Equipment

     • flasks, Erlenmeyer, 50 mL.                                ;

     • dispenser, capable of accurately dispensing 25 mL.

     • shaker, reciprocating, Eberbach or equivalent.

     • filter paper, Whatman #42.                   .            :

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
11
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 7
     • colorimeter.

     • colorimeter tubes, glass, 1 cm light path.

     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.


Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • sulphuric acid (H2SOJ, concentrated, reagent grade.

     • hydrochloric  acid (HCI), concentrated, reagent grade.

     • water—DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
       I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • hydrochloric acid (HCI), 0.5 N: Dilute 20.2 ml_ of concentrated HCI to a volume of 500 mL with
       DI water.

     • ammonium fluoride (NH4F), 1 N-In a  one litre volumetric flask, dissolve 37 g of HN4F in
       DI water.  Dilute to volume with DI water.  Store in a polyethylene bottle.

     • extracting solution-Add 15 ml of 1.0 N NH4F and 25 ml of 0.5 N HCI to 460 mL of DI water
       to give a solution  of 0.03 N HN4F and 0.025  N HCI.

     • ammonium molybdate-Dissolve 20.0 g of (NHJ6MO7024«4H20 in 225 mL of concentrated
       H.,SO4.  Dilute to 2 litres with DI water.

     • ascorbic acid—Dissolve 1.76 g  of ascorbic acid in 200 mL of DI water.

       NOTE:  This solution must be made fresh each day before use.

     • P stock standard-In a 1 litre volumetric flask, dissolve 0.876 g of KH2PO4 (which has been
       dried for 24  hours at 80° C) in the extracting solution.  Dilute to volume with extracting
       solution. This gives a 200 mg/L (w/v) P standard.


Calibration and Standardization

     Calibration standards should be prepared in the extraction solution. Prepare a standard curve
by plotting the transmittances of at least 5  standards (up to 10 standards are commonly used)
against P concentration on semilogarthmic graph paper.  Construct the calibration curve by finding
the "best" fit line of the plotted standard concentrations.  P is reported in mg/L.


Procedure

Step 1 -   Place 2.5 g of  soil (air dried and sieved through 2 mm sieve)  into a 50 mL Erlenmeyer
          flask.

Step 2 -   Add  25 mL of extracting solution.  Shake for 1 minute

Step?-   Filter through Whatman #42 paper.

-------
                                                              Chapiter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                     11
                     2.1
                     May 22, 1995
                     5 of 7
Step 4 -   Pipet an aliquot of the extract containing 1 to 20 /^g of P (usually 5 mL) into a 25 mL


Steps-   Add 0.5 mL of 5 N H2SO4 to reduce pH to 5.

Step 6 -   Add DI water  to  bring the  volume to about 20 mL,  then add 4 mL of ammonium
           molybdate reagent. Make to volume and mix

Step 7 -   Read absorbance at 880 /im after 10 min. The colour is s tabla for 24 hours.


Quality Control

Precision                                                    i

     One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To eliminate bias
due to position in the run, the routine sample duplicate should be analwied separately within !he
analytical run.  Within-run precision is determined from duplicates based  on relative percent
difference between the samples at an acceptance limit of a  RPD *• 10%.

Accuracy

     Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standaird or within the accuracy
windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever iis larger.

Method Blanks
                                                              are
            analyzed with each batch
            ' blanks should be run at
concentration of each blank should be
         lae blank corrected using the
      Three method blanks, carried through the extraction procedure,
of samples for each cation to measure potential contamination.  Method
the beginning, middle, and end of each analytical run.  The concentra
less than or equal to the instrument detection limit. All results should
mean of the acceptable method blank readings.

Quality Control Preparation Sample

      A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision
Accuracy of the QCPS should be within ± 10% of the long-term mean. Between-run precision can
be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard deviation.
If values plotted on a control chart deviate  from the long-term mean by more than three standard
deviations,  the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.

Quality Control Check Standard

     A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. The QCCS should contain all the analytes
of interest  with mid-calibration range concentrations.  Quantified values of the QCCS should be
within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.
                                                               i
     It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be (consistent through time
so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems. If

-------
                                                            Chapter:     11
                                                            Version:     2.1
                                                            Date:        May 22, 1995
                                                            Page:        6 of 7


analyzed values deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard deviations, the
instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

Suggested Run Format

QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.

      where:  QCCS = quality control check standard
               MB    = method blank
               QCPS = quality control preparation sample
               DUP  = duplicate sample
               SRM  = standard reference material


Calculations and Reporting

     To calculate the concentration of extractable P as follows:

               mg Pykg soil = mg P/mL solution x 10

This calculation assumes an aliquot of 5 mL of extracting solution was used.


References

American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards,  Vol. 11.01,
     Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia,
     Pennsylvania.

Holford, I.C.R., and B.R. Cullis. 1985a. Effects of phosphate buffer capacity on yield  response
     curvature and fertilizer requirements of wheat in relation to soil phosphate tests. Aust. I. Soil
     Res. 23:647-653

Holford, I.C.R., and B.R. Cullis. 1985b. An evaluation of eight soil phosphate extractants on acid
     wheat  growing soil.

McKeague, J.A.  (ed). 1978. Manual on soil sampling and methods of analysis. Can. Soc. Soil Sci.
     Ottawa, Ont.

Olsen, S.R., and LE. Sommers. 1982. Phosphorus. In Page, A.L. (ed.) Methods of soil analysis. Part
     2. Chemical and microbiological properties. 2nd ed. Agronomy 9. Am. Soc. Agron., Madison, WI,
     U.S.A.

Randall, G.W., and J. Grava. 1971. Effect of soil:  Bray no 1. ratios on the amount of phosphorus
     extracted from calcareous Minnesota soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 35:112-114.

Sheldrick, B.H. (ed). 1984. Analytical methods manual. Land Resource Research Institute. Agriculture
     Canada, Ottawa. LRRI Contribution No. 84-30.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
11
2.1
May 22,1995
7 of 7
Smillie, G.W., and J.K Syers. 1972, Calcium fluoride formation during eixtraction of calcareous soils
     with fluoride: II. Implications to the Bray P-1 test. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 36:25-30.

Smith, K.A., and A. Scott. 1983. Continuous-flow and discrete analysis;. In Smith, K.A. (ed) Soil
     analysis. Marcel Dekker. New York.

Thomas, G.W., and D.E. Peaslee. 1973. Testing of soils for phosphorus. In Walsh, L.M., and J D
     Beaton (ed.) Soil testing and plant analysis. Soil Sci. Soc. Inc. Madison, WI.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
12
2.1
May 22,1995
1 of 12
                           Cation Exchange Capacity
Introduction
     Cation exchange capacity (CEC), usually expressed in milliequivalents (meq) per 100 g of soil,
is a measure of the quantity of readily exchangeable cations neutralizing negative charge in the soil
(Rhoades, 1982). Negative charge in the soil can be derived from several sources which fall into two
categories:  permanent and pH-dependent (or variable) charge. Permanent charge sites are the
result of isomorphic substitution within the crystal structure of layer silicate minerals which are
commonly referred to as clay minerals.  Permanent charge CEC is independent of pH, electrolyte
concentrations, ion valences and the dielectric constant of the medium. The pH dependent CEC is
derived from broken bonds at mineral edges, dissociation of acidic functional groups in organic
matter and  sesquioxides present in the soil, and  preferential  adsorption of certain  ions on the
charged particle surfaces. In general, as the pH, electrolyte concentration, dielectric constant of the
medium, and the ion valences increase, the net contribution of pH-dependent charge to the overall
CEC increases.

     A close approximation of the CEC can be made by the summation of the exchangeable base
cations  of Ca2+, Mg2*, Na+, and K+ and the exchangeable acidity as determined by BaCI2-TEA
extraction or the addition of exchangeable Al extracted by KCI (USDA/SCS, 1972).
Review of Methods

     Most CEC methods begin with the displacement of existing cations with a saturating salt to
provide one index cation on the exchange complexes. Many different replacing cations have been
used to study the exchange characteristics of soils. Some of these include NH4  (Grove et al., 1982;
Mrozet al., 1985; Richter, 1986; Johnson et al., 1991; Soil Survey Laboratory Staff, 1992), K* (Gillman
and Uehara, 1980), Ba2+ (Kalisz and Stone, 1980; Rhoades, 1982; Hendershot and Duquette, 1986;
Ross and Bartlett, 1992), and Sr2* (Matsue and Wada,  1985).   After  removing or accounting for
excess saturating salt, the index cation is replaced with a different saturating salt and subsequently
measured to  provide an estimate of the CEC of soil.

     Although the choice of the replacing cation is considered arbitrary (Thomas, 1982),  the
selection of accompanying anions can be important.  If the final replacing solution contains SO4 ,
specific adsorption of this anion can affect the measured CEC in SO^2" adsorbing soils  (Matsue and
Wada, 1985; Hendershot and Duquette, 1986).   Although some concern  has been expressed
regarding the selection of CI" as the replacement anion (due to ion pairing with divalent cations),
Rhue and Reve (1990) did not see any differences in measured CEC when compared to CIO/.  Large
differences have been found  between soil  CEC measured in buffered (pH 7) acetate salts when
compared to neutral salts (Kalisz and Stone, 1980; Grove et al., 1982).  In acid forest soils, the
recommendation has been made to measure CEC with unbuffered salts (Rhoades, 1982; Hendershot
et al.,  1993).   The concentration of the  unbuffered salts has  also been shown to influence the
measured CEC (Wada and Okamura, 1980).

     Two saturating. solutions containing NH4+  are commonly used  for CEC  determination.
Ammonium acetate (1.0 N NH4OAc) buffered at pH 7.0 yields a CEC which is close to the total cation
exchange capacity for  a specific  soil.   This saturating solution is commonly used  for  soil
comparisons because it has the advantage of extracting all samples at the same pH (USDA-SCS,
1972).  In acid soils, this estimate  results in a high  CEC value relative to the CEC found under field
conditions because of adsorption of NH4+ ions to the pH-dependent exchange sites that exist above
the soil's natural pH level (Grove et al.,  1982). The overestimation will not occur when an unbuffered
neutral salt solution  such as ammonium chloride (1.0 N NH4CI)  is used. During the extraction, the

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Daite:
                                                            Page:
12
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 12
solution assumes the pH of the soil. The NH4CI CEC has been termed "effective" CEC because it
provides more unambiguous information about the behaviour of the soil under field conditions.


Reference Method

     The reference approach to long-term monitoring methods for cation exchange capacity is to
measure the effective CEC with 1 N NH4CI. Buffered salt solutions will not be used, as they are not
considered representative of the field forest soil condition. A 1 N NH4CI salt solution was chosen
over other commonly used solutions (NaCI, KCI, and BaCy due to its predominant use for extracting
exchangeable cations in studies of forested ecosystems in North America.

Summary of Method
     The soil sample is saturated with NH4+ from a solution of NH4CI. Excess NH4*
ethanol rinses. The NH4+ is displaced by Na+ and is measured by one of three methods: automated
  is removed by
distillation-titration, manual distillation-automated titration, or ammonium disiplacement-f low injection
analysis. These methods are based on Doxsee (1985), Rhoades (1982), and USDA/SCS (1984).

     The NH4CI saturating solution should be retained for the exchangeable cation determinations
(Chapter 13).                                                   \

NOTE: This method has been written assuming the use of a mechaniical extractor.

Interferences and Shortcomings

     Inconsistency in the NH4* saturating and rinsing steps is the greatest source of error. Soils
containing an abundance of minerals, such as biotite, muscovite, illite, and vermiculite, may retain
interlattice NH4+ and produce artificially high results.  The use of a mechanical extractor minimizes
inconsistency.                                                 :

Safety

     Wear protective clothing (laboratory coat and  gloves) and safety glasses when preparing
reagents, especially when concentrated acids and bases are used. The use of concentrated acids
and hydroxide solutions should be restricted to a fume hood.


Apparatus and Equipment


Apparatus  for Saturation Procedure

     • mechanical extractor, 24-place (Figure 1).

     • reciprocating  shaker.

     • balance, capable of weighing to 0.01 g.

     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.

     • wash bottle.

-------
                                Chapter:
                                Version:
                                Date:
                                Page:
12
2.1
May 22,1995
3 of 12
Figure 1. Mechanical Extractor.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
12
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 12
Apparatus for Analysis
     The apparatus and equipment needed are specific to the selected analytical method. It is not
necessary to have equipment for all three analytical methods.
     Ammonium Displacement-Flow Injection
     • flow injection analyzer (FIA), Lachat or equivalent, modified for ammonium chemistry with
       630 11 m interference filter and consisting of:
              a.  sampler.
                                                                I
              b.  analytical manifold with 200 jiL sample loop.
              c.  in-line heater.
              d.  colorimeter equipped with a 10 mm flow cell.
              e.  printer.
     • balance, capable  of weighing to 0.001 g.                    \
     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.
     Automated  Dlstlllatlon-Titratlon                            \
     • steam distillation-titration apparatus, Kjeltec Auto 1030 Analyser, or equivalent.
     • printer, Alphacom 40, or equivalent.                        |
     • digestion  tubes, 250 ml, straight neck.
     • balance, capable  of weighing to 0.1 g.
     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.
     • policeman, rubber.                                        <
     Manual Distillation/Automated Utratlon
     • automatic titrator with autosampler, Metrohm or equivalent.
     « Kjelclahl flasks. 800 mL
     • balance, capable  of weighing to 0.1 g.
     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.
     • policeman, rubber.

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
12
2.1
May 22,1995
5 of 12
Reagents and Consumable Materials  for Saturation Procedure

     • washed analytical filter pulp, Schleicher and Schuell, No. 289 (see procedure section for
       washing procedure).

     • glacial acetic acid (HC^OJ, concentrated, reagent grade.

     • ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH), concentrated, reagent grade.

     • ammonium chloride (NH4CI), reagent grade, 1 N - Dissolve 535 g in DI water and dilute to
       10 L

     • ethanol (CjHjOH), 95 percent, U.S.P.

     • Nessler's reagent-

       Add 4.56 g potassium iodide (KI) to 30 mL DI water in a beaker. Add 5.68 g mercuric iodide
       (Hgl;,).  Stir until dissolved.

       Dissolve 10 g NaOH in 200 mL DI water.

       Transfer NaOH solution to 250 mL volumetric flask.  Add Hg solution slowly.  Dilute to
       volume and mix thoroughly.  Solution should  not contain a precipitate. It can be used
       immediately.

     • water—Water used in all preparations should  conform to ASTM specifications for Type I
       reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • syringes, disposable, 60 mL polypropylene (use one sample tube, one reservoir tube, and
       one tared extraction syringe for each sample).

     • rubber tubing, 1/8 x 1/4 inch (for connecting syringe barrels).

     • bottles, linear polyethylene (LPE), 25 mL

     • tubes, glass, centrifuge or culture, with caps, 25 mL

     • weighing pans, disposable.


Reagents and Consumable Materials  for Analysis

     The reagents and  consumable materials needed are  specific to the selected  analytical
procedure.   It is not  necessary to  have the  reagents and materials for all three  analytical
procedures.

     Ammonium Displacement-Flow Injection Analysis

     The  reagents  and consumable  materials  used depend on recommendations  of  the
manufacturer of the FIA and may vary by make and model.

-------
                                                          Chapter:
                                                          Veirsion:
                                                          Date:
                                                          Page:
12
2.1
May 22, 1995
6 of 12
• hydrochloric acid, 0.1 N-Purehased or prepared by the following procedure:  Add 150 mL
  concentrated HCI to approximately 15 L DI water, dilute to 18 L Standardize 0.1 N HCI by
  titration against dried primary standard grade sodium carbonate to the methyl orange end-
  point.

• nitroferricyanide reagent-Dissolve 40 g potassium sodium tart rate (KNaC4H4O6) and 30 g
  sodium citrate  (Na3C8H5O7«2H2O) in 500 ml DI water.  Add 10 g sodium hydroxide pellets
  (NaOH).  Add 1.5 g sodium nitroferricyanide (Na2Fe(CN)5NO»2l-l2O)a dilute to 1.00 L, and mix
  well.  Store in a dark bottle.  Prepare fresh solution monthly.

• sodium hypochlorite reagent-Dissolve 20 g sodium hydroxide and 20 g boric acid in 150 mL
  of DI water.  Add 800 mL 5 percent solution NaOCI. Dilute to 1.00 L with DI water. Store
  in a dark bottle. Prepare fresh solution monthly.

• sodium phenate reagent-Dissolve 95 ml of 88 percent liquified phenol in 600 ml DI water.
  While stirring, slowly add 120 g NaOH. Cool.  Add 100 ml ethanol  and dilute to 1.00 L
  Store in a dark bottle.

• nitrogen standard solution, 1,000 mg  NH4-N/L~Dissolve 3.819 g ammonium chloride (NH4CI),
  dried at 105* C, in DI water and dilute to 1.00 L

• working standards-Pipet 15.0,10.0,6.0, and 2.0 mL of the nitrogen standard solution, above,
  into 100 mL volumetric flasks. Bring to volume with 0.1 N HCI. This will yield 150, 100, 60,
  and 20 mg NH4-N/L working standards. Pipet 5 mL of the 100 mg NH4-N/L working standard
  into a 100-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with 0.1 N HCI. This provides a 5 mg
  NH4-N/L working standard. Prepare fresh working standards weekly.

• water-Water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type I
  reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

• weighing pans, disposable.


Automated Dlstlllatlon-Tltnition

• sodium chloride (NaCI).

• antifoam, silicons spray bottle.

• hydrochloric acid (HCI), 0.10 N, standardized.

• boric acid (H3BOg), 4 percent (w/v) aqueous solution-Add 720 13 boric acid to about 4 L DI
  water in a large stainless steel beaker. Heat to near boiling and stir until crystals dissolve.
  Add to a 5 gallon Pyrex bottle about  12 L DI water. Transfer hot solution through a large
  polyethylene funnel into the bottle. Dilute to 18 L with DI wateir and mix well.

• water—Water used  in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type I
  reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

• compressed air.

• weighing pans, disposable.                                 '

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
12
2.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 12
     Manual Dlatillatlon-Aiitomatlc Tltratlon

     • sodium chloride (NaCl).

     • antifoam mixture-Mix equal parts of mineral oil and octanol.

     • boric acid (H-jBO-j), 4 percent.

     • hydrochloric acid (HCI), 0.1 N.

     • sodium hydroxide (NaOH), 1 N-Add 500 mL 50 percent NaOH so|ution to 8 L of DI water in
       a 9.5 L Pyrex solution bottle. Dilute to 9 L with DI water and mix well.

     • zinc, granular.

     • water-Water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type I
       reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • compressed air.

     • beakers, plastic disposable, 250 mL

     • weighing pans, disposable.


Calibration and Standardization

     Calibration standards should be prepared in the extraction solution.

Flow Injection Analysis Calibration

     For the  FIA, use standards containing 0, 5,  20, 60, 100, and 150 mg NH4-N/L to develop a
calibration curve. A regression  of the standard curve should have an intercept close to zero. Air
bubbles can produce sharp sudden peaks which destroy the calibration curve.  In the event of air
bubbles, the calibration curve and all samples analyzed since the last quality control check sample
(QCCS)  must be reanalyzed. Standard values should not vary by more than 5 percent relative
standard deviation (%RSD).

Tltratlon Calibration

     Titrants used in  the  automated titrations are  calibrated prior  to analysis  to establish the
normality. The  normality is checked weekly. Should the check value differ from  the normality by
more than 5 percent, two additional checks are run and the mean of the three check values is used
as the normality. The same standard titrant should be used for all samples within a batch.


Procedure

     Before proceeding with the analytical procedure, the analyst should  be certain that all QC
procedures have been implemented, all  labware has been cleaned properly, and valid instrumental
detection limits (IDLs) have been obtained.

NOTE:  This method has been written assuming the use of a mechanical extractor.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
12
2.1
May 22, 1995
8 of 12
 Pulp Washing
                                                                  i

 NOTE:  Commercial filter pulps often are contaminated and will have to be washed.

 Step 1 -   Prepare sample tubes by tightly compressing a 0.5 g ball of filter pulp into bottom of
           syringe barrel  with a modified plunger.  Modify the plunger by  removing the rubber
           portion of the plunger, and cut off the plastic protrusion.

 Step 2 -   Add 50 mL 0.1  N HCI to the syringe containing the pulp and extract rapidly.

 Step 3 -   Add 50 mL DI water to the syringe containing the pulp and extract rapidly.

 Step 4 -   Repeat Step 3 again.

 Step 5 -   Remove any excess solution from the washed pulp by  applying gentle suction to the
           syringe tip. Proceed immediately with an extraction.

 Extraction                                                      \
                                                      *
 Step 1 -   For mineral soils, weigh  5.00 g air-dry soil, place  in sample itube, and  record exact
           weight. Place sample tube in upper disc of extractor and connect to inverted, tared
           extraction syringe, the plunger of which is inserted in the slot of the stationary disc of
           the extractor.  Fill the syringe to the 25 mL mark with NH4CI.  Stir sample and NH4CI with
           glass stirring rod for 15 seconds, rinse rod with NH4CI, and fill syringe to the 30 mL
           mark.  Let stand for 20 minutes.

           For organic soils, weigh 1.25 g of air-dried soil into a small glass tube and record exact
           weight. Add 2 mL ethanol as a wetting agent. (If the organic soil wets easily, it is not
           necessary to add the ethanol.)  When the soil is moistened, add 15 mL NH4CI, cap, and
           shake  for one  hour on a reciprocating shaker.  Place  sample tube in upper disc of
           extractor and connect to inverted, tared extraction  syringe,  the  plunger of which is
           inserted in the  slot of the stationary disc of the extractor.  Then quantitatively transfer
           the sample and NH4CI to  the sample tube and fill to the 25 mL mark with NH4CI.  Let
           stand for 20 minutes.

           NOTE:  Up to 35 mL may be used for transfer; see Step 2.

Step 2 -   Put reservoir tube on top of sample tube; extract rapidly  until NH4CI is at a depth of 0.5
           to  1.0 cm above sample. Turn off extractor. Add about 45 rnL NH4CI to reservoir tube,
           turn on extractor, and extract overnight or for approximately 16 hours. Do not allow the
           soil to dry between the time the extractor is turned off and back on.

           NOTE:  If 35 mL are used in Step 1,  reduce 45 mL to 35 mLL  Total NH4CI used during
           extraction should be approximately 70 mL                 j

Step 3 -    The next morning, switch off extractor and  pull plungers down as far as extractor will
           allow.  Disconnect syringes from sample tubes,  leaving  rublber connectors on sample
           tubes.  Weigh each syringe containing the NH4CI extract to the nearest 0.01 g.  The final
           weight  and tare weight are used to calculate the volume of ammonium acetate extract
           (Section 12.0), according to the formula in the calculation and reporting section.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
                                                                        12
                                                                        2.1
                                                                        May 22, 1995
                                                                        9 of 12
Step 4 -
Step 5 -
 Step 6 -
         Mix the extract in each syringe by shaking ma™^y-  *'^^^
         polyethylene bottle twice with small volumes ofthe extract solutionjheniilljhe^bottle
         with extract solution and discard the excess.  This solution is reserved for analysis of
         exchangeable cations as described in Chapter 13.

         Return uooer 2-disc unit to starting position.  Attach the syringes to the sample tubes,
         and rTnsePS?e fides of sample tubes with ethanol from a wash bottle. Fill sample tubes
         to the 20 mL mark  stir, and let stand for 15 to 20 minutes.  Place reservoir tube in
         lamole tube" Extract rapidly until the level of ethanol is  0.5 to 1.0 cm above sample.
         Tumoff ex?acto?and add enough ethanol to the reservoir to ensure an excess over the
         capacity of the syringe.  Extract for 45 minutes.

         After  the extractor has stopped, turn off the switch, pull the plungers_ down^ remove
         svrinaes and discard the ethanol wash.  Return the upper unit of the extractor to
         sfficfoptionreattach syringes to the sample tube, fill reservoir tubes with about 45
         ^SS^S^SMBimd time for approximately 45 minutes.  When extractor
         &rt5Stf£»a« syringes and discard ethanol. After the s ^SSnff!^
         collect a few drops of ethanol extract on a spot plate.  Test for residual NH, in each
         SmSe by adding four drops of Nessler's reagent to one drop of solution   It the> test
         isT positive fre   orange eiidpoint) repeat  another ethanol extraction  of the affected
         sar^te^ndle'st bousing Nessli's reagent until a negative test is obtained.
 Analytical Procedure Using FIA

 Step 1 •
          Add 50 mL of 0.1 N HCI and extract at a setting of 10 (approximately one hour) and
          record volume.
 Step 2-    Disconnect syringes and save the HCI extract for FIA analysis.

 Step 3 -    Operate the FIA according to manufacturer's instructions.

 Step 4 -    Read mg NH4-N/L; if concentrations exceed calibration standards, dilute in the instrument
            calibration range and reanalyze.


 Analytical Procedure using Automated Distillation-Titration

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                                                          12
                                                                          2.1
                                                                          May 22, 1995
                                                                          10 of 12
  Analytical Procedure using Manual Distillation-Automated Titration

  Step 1 -   Transfer sample to an 800 mL Kjeldahl flask.
 Step 2 -   Add
           40
                                                                     2 9 flranular ** and
  Step 3 -   Set upKjeldahl distillation apparatus and distill until 175-180 mL of distillate is collected
            in a 250 mL plastic beaker containing 50 mL of 4 percent boric acid solution.

  St6P *"   ESStoX** beakef t0 distillation apparatus and operate according to manufacturer's


  Step 5 -   Read mL titration and record with the normality of titrant.


  Quality Control

  Precision
due to
due to
                nmnh "aly^d in delicate w,!th each run of thirty samples. To eliminate bias
                in the run, the routine sample duplicate should be analyzed separately within the
           E5-  Wi!tin-run P,fecision  is determined from duplicates baled I on ^3T Seem
 difference between the samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD «s 10%.         '«««• percent

 Accuracy

      Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
 ^nH^°UraCy "Wl*,.*10^ fr°m the known concentration of the standard or witWrfthe accuracy
 windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.          accuracy

 Method Blanks
           method. blan.ks- carr'ed through the extraction procedure, are analyzed with each batch
           J? rm-HCJ? Cat^,n t°,measur,f P°ten«a' contamination. Method blanks should be run art
           9>   d  e< and end of each ana|yt'cal run.  The concentration of each blank should be
     than or equal to the instrument detection limit.

 Quality Control Preparation Sample

      A matrix matched iivhouse quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
              "8 f a"l5't ls used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision.
                       °US ^lhin i 10% of the tons-t6^ "i^n.  Eletween-run precision can
                         the,?CPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard deviation.
Ho-          0rVa ^"u01 chart deviate from tne ton9-term mean by more than three standard
deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.
Quality Control Check Standard
     A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
samples,  and after  the last  sample  of  each analytical run.   This standard  should  have
concentrations at about mid-calibration range. Quantified values of the QCCS should be within ±10%
of the known concentration of the standard.

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
                                               12
                                               2.1
                                               May 22, 1995
                                               11 of 12
     It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems. If
analyzed values deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard deviations, the
instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

Suggested Run Format

QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.
       where:  QCCS
               MB
               QCPS
               DUP
               SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
 Calculations and Reporting


 Flow Injection Analysis

       CEC (meq/100 g)   = {([Final Sol. Vol.] x [Inst. Reading]) x ([Total Diluted Vol.] + [Aliquot
            l   q    aj     vol.]) x 1 L} + {[1,000 mL x 1 meq + 14 mg x 1] -t- (sample wt. x (1-
                           [MOIST]) + (100 + [MOIST])}
 Titration

        [CEC (meq/100 g)]
   {[Titrant Volume] x [Normality] x 1} + {[sample wt.] x (1 - [MOIST])
   + (100 + [MOIST]) x-100}
           NOTE:  moisture corrections [MOIST] are applicable if sample extracted \snoi oven-
           dried, thereby, removing all free water.  The moisture correction factor is as follows:

              [(1 - moisture content in %) + (100 + moisture content in %)]
 References

 American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standard^VolL11.01,
      Standard Speciffcatfon for Reagent Water, D-1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia,
      PA.

 Doxsee, K. 1985. Cation Exchange Capacity in Nursery Soils Using FIA (Flow Injection Analysis).
      Am. No. 1503-15. Weyerhaeuser Technology Center, Research Division, Tacoma, WA.

 Gillman G P  and G. Uehara. 1980. Charge characteristics of soils with variable charge minerals:
      II. Experimental. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 44:252-255.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
12
2.1
May 22, 1995
12 of 12
 Grove, J.H., C.S. Fowler, and M.E. Surnner. 1982. Determination of the charge character of selected
      acid soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:32-38.

 Hendershpt, W.H. and M. Duquette. 1986. A simple barium chloride method for determining cation
      exchange capacity and exchangeable cations. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 50:605-608.

 Hendershot  W.H., H. Lalande, and  M. Duquette. 1993. Ion exchange and exchangeable cations
      ]Q M.R. Carter, (ed.). Soil sampling and  methods of analysis.  Can.  Soc.  Soil Sci Lewis
      Publishers, Ann Arbor, MI. p. 167-176

 Johnson, C.E., A.H. Johnson, and T.G. Siccama.  1991. Whole-tree clear-cutting effects on
      exchangeable cations and soil acidity. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 55:502-508.

 Kalisz, P.J.  and E.L Stone. 1980. Cation exchange capacity of acid forest humus layers Soil Sci
      Soc. Am. J. 44:407-413.

 Matsue, N., and K. Wada. 1985. A new equilibrium method for cations exchange capacitv
      measurement. Soil Sci.  Soc. Am. J.  49:574-578.

 Mroz, G.D., M.F. Jurgensen, and D.J. Frederick. 1985. Soil nutrient changes following whole tree
      harvesting on three northern hardwood sites. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 49:1552-1557.

 Rhoades J.D 1982 Cation exchange capacity. In A.L Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis, Part 2
      2nd edition. Agronomy 9:149-158.

 Rhue, R.D., and W.H. Reve. 1990. Exchange capacity and adsorbed-cation charge as affected by
      chloride and perchlorate. Soil. Sci. Soc. Am. J.  54:705-708.

 Rtehter, D.D. 1986. Sources of acidity in some forested Udults. Soil Sci. J3oc,, Am. J. 50:1584-1589.

 Ross, D.S. and R.J Bartlett. 1992. Ionic strength effects on acidity and cations leached from forest
      floor cores. Soil. Sci. Soc. Am. J. 56:1796-1799.

 Thomas  G.W. 1982. Exchangeable cations. In A.L Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis, Part 2
     2nd edition. Agronomy 9:159-165.

 U.S. Department of Agriculture/Soil Conservation Service. 1972. Procedures for collecting soil samples
     and methods of  analysis for soil  surveys. Soil Survey Investigations Rep  No  1  US
     Department of Agriculture. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.   v     '

U.S. Department of Agriculture/Soil Conservation Service. 1984. Soil survey laboratory methods and
     procedures for collecting soil samples. Soil Survey Investigations Rep. No. 1, U.S. Department
     of Agriculture. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

Wada, K, andI Y. Okamura. 1980. Electric charge characteristics of Ando A, and buried A, horizons
     soils. J. Soil Sci. 31:307-314.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
13
2.1
May 22,1995
1of 11
                              Exchangeable Cations

Introduction

     Exchangeable cations are those cations (positively charged tons) in soil that can be «xchanged
with cations of an  added salt solution.   They  are comprised of exchangeable bases and
exchanteabfe acidity. The quantity of the exchangeable cations required to neutralize the negative
chaVgein soil is defined as the cation exchange capacity (CEC). The negative charge ,rrso, arises
from factors such as isomorphous substitution within layer silicate minerals, broken chemical bonds
on the edges and external surfaces of soil minerals, and the dissociation of acidic functional groups
in soil organic compounds.

      Exchanqeable bases commonly found in soils, presented in order of relative abundance, include
cateiun^agnesium, potassium, and sodium.   Exchangeable acidity is primarjy composed of
excnangeabli aluminum and  hydrogen.  The exchange complex  of most so.ls fate ;somewhere
beuveen beina saturated with basic or acidic cations.  The fraction of the CEC that is comprised
ot e^hSngeable baS is drihed as the base saturation and is extremely important in determining
whether a soil is relatively acidic or basic. Soil acidification occurs when base cations are replaced
with acidic cations in the soil.

      The exchangeable cations are essential nutrients for plant growth. Acidic inputs to soil result
in a replacement of the base cations with acidic cations. A concern for forest health is that aodic
deposSion could result in a diminishing supply of essential nutrients and a simultaneous^crease
In Aluminum due to increased Al solubility that can  be toxic to plant  roots.  Andersson (1986)
JonchSedThat^cdicdeposition has contributed to an accelerated decline in the base saturation
ofseveral  soils  in Sweden over the period of 1943-1984. Nutrient def ,c,enc,es^ magne s «" • «*
calcium have been correlated to key symptoms of forest decline in Europe (Krause et al., 1986).

      As exchangeable cations are leached from the soil, the soil loses its ability to buffer further
 acidic incuts   In the absence of other buffering mechanisms such as sulphate adsorption soil
 wat£ tSs to tocome more acidic and increase in its concentration of aluminum and heav?mto^
 The decline in base saturation in soils therefore has important implications to the quality of streams
 and lakes  in forested ecosystems (Reuss and Johnson, 1986)


 Review of Methods

      By definition, any added cation should be able to replace an ^han.9aenab^^^^
 It is for this reason that  the choice of the replacement cat,on has oftenlbeen constdere d as
 somewhat arbitrary. The consequence is that a tremendous variety of replacement solutions have
 been used by soil scientists for the characterization of exchangeable cat,ons ,n soil   Thei ony
 cations that might be  excluded from the selection process  are those one would wish to.measure
 such as 5*+ Mo2* K* Na+, and Al**. The only exception to this approach  is that Na* is used in
 certain soHregiofs wtere its'cTntribution to the exchangeable+bases is minimal. The most common
 replacement cations are NH»*. Ba2+, and S^ although U+, K+, and Cs+  have all been used.

      The anion in the replacement solution cannot be considerecI as an arbitrary'Choice.  Antons
 can be selected to provide a neutral salt solution  such as with Cf or SO4 salts or a pH  buffered
 ^alt solution such as 1 N NKOAc (pH 7). The quantity of acidic cations, such as aluminum, in soils
  %w dependent on the pHofihe soil. Any anion that alters the soil pH will alter the amount of
  exchangeable acidity measured as well  as the CEC.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
13
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 11
      J??H ^ f. °" ? the rep]f cement solutton can nave an impact on measured soil properties
          h C(f °; ^y ,f act,°rf affect the measured CEC of a soil including the pH of the extract ng
          r8 elec!.ro|yte 'eve • the va'ence (charge) of the counter ion, and the dielectric constant of
 the extracting and wash solutions.  The magnitude of a change in measured CEC for  any of these
 tte sotl  ependS °n the S01' Or9anic matter content and tne Predominant clay minerals present in


      The measurement of exchangsable acidity and CEC can be approached in two different ways.
 One approach is to try and estimate the "effective" acidity or CEC or that measurement which

 SSS^^Sff^f* tht f ct?a.' oon?tloz in the fiekj- ™s ls fi|enera"y SSSSEdSSh
 neutral unbuffered salts.  A recent technique has been to use an unbuffered BaCL salt to saturate
 the soj and then measure the CEC of the soil at soil solution concentration similar to a field soil
 £™9 hAcomPuls«ye ^placement of Ba with the addition of a dilute solution of MgSO, (Rhoades
     A' £2 alternative approach is to measure the "total potential" acidity or CEC by buffering the soil
 TO pM o.o.                                                       T

      A  wide  variety of soihsolution ratios have been used in the measurement of exchangeable
 cations.  The mam constraint is that an excess of cations be  added to effectively replace the
 exchangeable cations in the soil. The equilibration time with the soil also varies considerably from
 a few minutes to overnight extractions.  Filtering or centrifuging are both used to obtain a clean
 extract for chemical analysis after equilibration with the soil. Filtering tends to provide a cleaner
 solution as organic materials may float in solutions which are centrifuged. A disadvantage of filter
 materials is that they may be found to contaminate the extract with low levels of base  cations and
 w»ho,rf^m«aSU*ra«ble CEC.:, For thls reason. » is important to run reagent blanks  (extractions
 without  soil) to test for possible contamination in the extraction process.

      The majority of CEC methods require a displacement of the saturating ion by another salt
 solution. The displacement is often accomplished after the soil has been washed free of excess
 saturating solution.  The solutions used to  wash the  soil vary from cleionized water to alcohol
 solutions (methyl, ethyl, or isopropyl alcohols).


 Reference Method

      The reference approach to long-term  monitoring methods for exchangeable bases is  to
 measure the exchangeable bases, effective acidity, and effective CEC with 1 N NKCI.  Buffered salt
 f?,UMun™ Wl1 not,b? used as *** are not considered representative of the forest soil condition.  A
 1 N NH4CI salt solution was chosen due to its predominant use for extracting exchangeable cations
 in studies of  forested  ecosystems in North America.   The NH4+ ton will not interfere  with the
 measurement  of any of the exchangeable cations and has been shown (Robarge, 1988)  to be an
 essentially equivalent extractant of exchangeable Al as 1 N KCI (the most common exchangeable  Al
 extractant).   The  use  of just one extracting solution also reduces  the  time and analytical
 requirements for measurements. A compulsive replacement method is mot being recommended as
 it is felt  that it would be too time consuming and operator dependent for long-term  monitoring
 purposes.
=««/      ef,fecj'Y8 CEC is measured by replacing the NH4+ ton with Na+ after washing the soil with
50% ethyl alcohol to remove excess soil solution NH4+ ion and testing for art absence of cr in the
wash with a AgNO3.

     Two choices for extraction procedures are provided in the methods section. In addition to a
common equilibration procedure that does not require any specialized equipment, an automated

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
13
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 11
equilibration procedure is also included as many of the soil laboratories in Canada are presently
using this equipment.
Summary of Method
     Previously prepared extracts from the CEC procedure a^ analyzed for aluminum calcium,
                                                                          "—
 is a measure of the concentration of that cation in the extract.








 Dhotocurrents from the photomultiplier tubes are processed by a computer system.  ™e signa is
 pyoportional to £e analyte concentration and is calibrated by analyzing a senes of standards (U.S.
 EPA, 1983; Fassel, 1982)
      Fmi^inn snectroscoov (ES) can be used to measure potassium and sodium.  The sample is





 the element.

 Interferences and Shortcomings
 effects.




 background effects, or using a narrower slit width.





  phosphate in the extractant.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Dale:
                                                            Page:
                                                                        13
                                                                        2.1
                                                                        May 22, 1995
                                                                        4 of 11
      The ,mos-t c0"1"100 Physical interference in the analysis of soils exchange solutions is salt
        fSF fh>Hbum-r«or n?bulizer-  Chough dilution will reduce this problem Twif also
 change the matrix and any effect it may have on the instrument read-out.
 Sandard i
                     u*ual|y compensated for by analyzing samples and all calibration standards,
                     JSX F01*01 standards in the same matrix. Matrix effects may be tested by
                    5ddltlons- and comparison with an alternative method of analysis.  When the

                  8      *    ^"^ * readily C°rr*Cted' the analyses must *
           prot®?ive closing (laboratory coat and gloves) and safety glasses' when preparing
              0   Whe" hco?clntrated adds and bases are used. The UM of concentratedac 31

Apparatus and Equipment

Determination by Atomic Absorption
     • burner, as recommended by the spectrophotometer manufactureir. When nitrous oxide is
       used as the oxidant, a nitrous oxide burner is required.
     * Si^H3?"0^-'31!!08' Sirgle element 'amps preferred; multi-elerriemt lamps may be used
       Electrodeless discharge lamps may be used where available,   j

     • balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 g.                        \

     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.
Determination by Inductively Coupled PA
                                            'asma             ,

       inductively coupled plasma-atomic emission spectrometer.      >

     • balance, capable of weighing to 0.01 g.
                                                               i'
     • balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.


Determination by Emission Spectroscopy                  '

     • flame photometer, direct-reading or internal-standard type; or an atomic absorption
       spectrometer operated in the flame emission mode.                   aosorpuon

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
13
2.1
May 22, 1995
5 of 11
       balance, capable of weighing to 0.001 g.

       balance calibration weights, 3-5 weights covering expected range.
Reagents and Consumable Materials
     Acids used in the preparation of standards and for sample processing must be ofutow*igh
purity grade (e.g., Baker Ultrex grade or SeaStar Ultrapure grade).  To min.mize «noerrtMrt»nerf
cations in standard solutions by evaporation, store solutions in linear or high density polyethylene
Stttes  uSsma I containers to reduce the amount of dry element that may be picked up from the
tettte walls" wten tffSHS is poured. Shake each container thoroughly before use to redissolve
any accumulated salts from the walls.

     Detonized (DI) water used for preparing or diluting  rea9ents^tandards  and samples must
meet purity specifications for Type I reagent water as given in ASTM D 1193 (ASTM, 1984).


Determination by Atomic Absorption

      • hydrochloric acid, concentrated (12 M HCI)-Ultrapure grade,  Baker Instra-Analyzed or
       equivalent.

      • HCI (1 percent v/v)~Add 5 mL concentrated HCI to 495 ml. DI water.

      • nitric acid, concentrated-Ultrapure grade, Baker Instra-Analyzed or equivalent.

      • HN03 (0.5 percent v/v HNCg-Add 0.50 ml HNO3 to 50 mL DI water and dilute to 100 mL

      • primary standard solutions-Prepare frcm ultra-high purity grade chemicals as directed in
        the individual procedures.  Commercially available stock standard solutions may also be
        used.
      • dilute calibration standards-Prepare a series of standards of
        appropriate stock metal solution in the specific matrix to cover the concentration range
        desired.  Prepare all calibration standards in concentration units of mg/L.

      • fuel-Commercial grade acetylene with in-line filter is generally acceptable.

      • oxidant-Air may be supplied from a compressed-air line, a laboratory compressor, or from
        a cySer oppressed air. Nitrous oxide is supplied from a cylinder of compressed gas.

      • lanthanum chloride (LaCy matrix modifier solution-Dissolve 29 g La2O3. s'°w|y and in sma"
        portions, in 250 mL of concentrated HCI.

         Caution:  Reaction is violent. Dilute to 500 mL with DI water.

      • water-Water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type I
        reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

      • weighing pans, disposable.

-------
                              Chapter:
                              .Version:
                              Daite:
                              Page:
 Determination by Inductively Coupled Plasma
                                                                      13
                                                                      2.1
                                                                      May 22, 1995
                                                                      6 of 11
                                                                            Baker
 80D ""- —"*•'«' HO to <00 mL n water and d»u,e ,o 1.00


f8^1"'0 8'avity 1.41)-Ultrapu,. grade. Baker tostra-Analyzed or
       £JLtoS.

       HNO, (SO percent vAO-Add 500 mL concentrated HNO, to <00 mL DI water and dilute to

     • argon, oxygen-free.
                                                     * «™  ««-«»• for Type I
     • weighing pans, disposable.


Determination by Emission Spectroscppy
      NOTE: Uthium is used to suppress fonization of K+ and Na+.
                                                                •**

                                                    lithlum so'utk!n

    • acetylene (commercial grade or better).

-------
                                                         Chapter:
                                                         Version:
                                                         Date:
                                                         Page:
13
2.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 11
      water-Water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type I
      reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

      weighing pans, disposable.
Calibration and Standardization
     Calibration standards should J^-P^
Within each class of instruments (^ JCP- « ^SirS^Sa^s of at toast three additional
Calibrate by analyzing a calibration blank (0 1 mg £ s*andar JJ jCp jssusedl a multi-element standard
 Procedure
 detection limits (IDLs) have been obtained.

      General procedures for AA, ICP, and ES are given in following sections.


 Procedure for Determinations by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry

      Differences among AA sp«ct^^
 applicable to every instrument. ^^^^oS toltowraSS lamp for the analysis, allow the
 instrument. In general, after ^^f^^SSlSK^ Instrument is operated in a double-beam
 lamp to warm up for a minimum of 15m nutes ^"'f s*h®t n^ monochromator at the correct
 mode.   During this period,  align the •nstrument  ^tion we        ^^ cgthode current

 wavelength, select the Pr°Pf Vm0"?^L°manuf actur^ ^^Subsequently, light the flame and regulate
 according to the recommendation irt •*• ^"jJfJJS 5£Sr flow rate for maximum percent
  Calcium and Magnesium

  Step 1 -
  Step 2 -   Calibrate the instrument.

  Step 3 -   Analyze the samples.
                                   solution) as the dilullon agent.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Pagp:
                                                                     13
                                                                     2.1
                                                                     May 22, 1995
                                                                     8 of 11
   Step 4-   Dilute and  __
            as outlined in
                          i any samples for which the concentration exceeds the linear range,


Step 5 -   Record results as mg/L in the soil extract.
  Potassium and Sodium
  Step 1 -   Calibrate the instrument.
  Step 2-   Analyze the samples.




                                                                        *•
  Step 4-   Ftecord results as mgyt in the soil extract.

  Procedure for Determinations by Inductively Coupled Plasma

  Step 1 -
 Step2-
 81613 3 '
                                      8yStem With the "*"hod blank
                                                                            W water
 Step 5 -   Record results for Caa+; Mga+; Na+; and AI3+. Analyze K+ by AAS or ES.


 Procedure for Determinations by Emission Spectroscopy










Step 1 -    Calibrate the instrument.

Step 2 -    Analyze the samples.

-------
                                      Chapter:
                                      Version:
                                      Date:
                                      Page:
                                                13
                                                2.1
                                                May 22,1995
                                                9 of 11

                                                    by ICP.
Step 3 -

Step 4 -  Record results for K+ and Na+. Analyze Ca- and Mg~ by ICP or AAS and


Quality Control

Precision



difference between the samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD 5: 10%.

Accuracy




 Method Blanks



 toss than or equal to the instrument detection limit.

 Quality Control Preparation Sample




 •n	i..__ _I^**A^I r\n a rvintrnl nnart deviate TlOm intJ luiiy taiiii iii»««ii "j         _i:_— ^tf,r\f>
                                            i and quantification steps.
Quality Control Check Standard
        - control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at
o, ,nraresi ^^s^^^^£^^^-^^:^ -
within ±10% of the known concentration of the stanaaro.

-------
                                                     Chapter:
                                                     Version:
                                                     Date:
                                                     Page:
                                         13
                                         2.1
                                         May 22, 1995
                                         10 of 11
  Suggested Run Format

  QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8 QCPS
  QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,'
  2S2' £amples 1S to 25* SRM,
  QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB,  QCCS
       where:  QCCS
              MB
              QCPS
              DUP
              SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
 Calculations and Reporting

     The appropriate reporting units for the exchangeable cations are rneq/100 g of soil.

 Final Extract Volume = [Final wt. (g) + Tare wt. (g)] + 1.0105        !

      SSTt&Tfi^

 Exchangeable Cation (meq/100 g) =

      Mll'+^r^^^
      correction, if applicable)] |x 100             fl))  t(samPle «"*• m mfl) x (moisture
                   sr-s                                ^^ •— *
           [(1 - moisture content in %) + (100 + moisture content in %)]
References

       Soii.'!?^1'0 dep°Sition and its ef(Mts °" •" •*•«» of Nordto Europe. Water, Air


-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
13
2.1
May 22, 1995
11 of 11
Reuss J O  and D.W. Johnson. 1986. Acid deposition and the acidification of soils and waters.
     Ecotogicalstudies; v.59. Springer-Verlag, New York.

Rhoades, J.D. 1982. Cation exchange capacity. In A.L Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis, Part 2.
     2nd edition. Agronomy 9:149-158.

U.S. Envfronmental Protection Asency.
      method 200.0. atomic absorption ™°.?'™ ™     entanalysls of Water and wastes.
                                                                 l Ohio.

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Pagie:
                                                                     14
                                                                     2.1
                                                                     May 22, 1995
                                                                     1of 7
   Introduction
                    Amorphous Iron and Aluminum Oxides
                                                                         to


                            ^^
responsible for most of the SO4 adsoratfon SSSt a^SmS  10™*'^' amorphous phase is
Johnson and Todd (1983) found  howewr that nniJ Iho    ??,*' 1I78; lRajan- 1978- Sin9h, 1980).
with S04 adsorption.  Part oflis dTs^epaSS may b? 2S.±l^0'*Si ^P* Si9nlfi^ntly
extractant used is not specific for the remo'SfoT a^p&Fe SdAlSS S°" C°nditi°nS' the

Review of Methods

                                                ^thod for amorphous Fe and A. oxides
                            Sfi^^                       4 as described by




                                                   0 In order to isolate the amorphous
  Schwertmann
 inorganic fraction
                                                                   ..

 removal from the sample prior NH Ox treatment ^r?d i?hntn * ^aker (1<)83) suggests magnetite
 should also be exercised l/rt^2d                    St al" (198|1) Su99est that
                                                        JohnsonandTodd (1983) report
 Washington. The mineral ha^t^SSS^1L9aa^1rOm -^ HamPs^e Sd
 Ministry of the Environment, unpublished datS McKeaaul anri n 8S22£8imIlar trends 
-------
                                                         Chapter:
                                                         Version:
                                                         Date:
                                                         Page:
                14
                2.1
                May 22,1995
                2 of 7
samples, NH^xtractable Fe
these could be explained by the PfeseJ^fa°* ^"^ than NH I Ox, in some cases up to five times
every sample (n=27), »*d«»£an«ne«^                     extraction can be used as an

                                                   * spectes- rt ls felt that this reaflent
              investigation before it is used routinely.
  ^
                       Fe and A.
monitoring programs.  On a smaller
rn°n.i^g ^es»arcn programs, the
  the reference procedure is outlined
 Reference Method

     The above evidence suggests that. NH4Ox
 amorphous Fe and Al species from <*rta. "
 purpose.  We. therefore, do not «W« t
 fractions on soil samples connected with
 by Agriculture Canada (1984).

      Th. NH.OX exKacUon -jf^^'SjSlirt^





  extraction, it is suggested that in order to Mobtan an spre se n«^ sduepto' rinding. It is advisable
  less than 0.5 mm be used  This will i ^JMJJJJJ Cftrst and then grind the remaining sample to

  SSS^JKE!^^                      ^ -ided- For
  refer to Neary and Barnes (1993).

  Summary of Method

       Soil samples are extracted for four
  reduces Fe and Al to tower va to no? «JJ» • ^SS^Sm dissolution of crystalline
  be performed in the dark as ultraviolet light I tes bee n to un a ro p ^^^ rf      1964). samples are
   Interferences and Shortcomings

                                                               necessan--

        NOTE: If dBuflco wi* delonized (DI) water is used, matrix-matched oalibrato, s«andards and
        QC solutions must also be diluted.

-------
                                                          Chapter:
                                                          Version:
                                                          Dalte:
                                                          Page:
14
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 7
  Safety



  Apparatus and Equipment
      • tubes, polystyrene, disposable, 17 X 100 mm, with caps, 15 mL
      • dispenser, Oxford or equivalent, capable of dispensing 10 mL liquid.
      • glazed weighing paper.
      • flasks, volumetric, 1 L
      • filter paper, Whatman #1.
      • shaker, reciprocating, Eberbach or equivalent.
      • centrifuge, capable of holding 17 X 100 mm, 15 mL tubes, and reaching 2500 rpm.
      • pH meter, and electrode.
      • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.
      • tubes to fit AAS or ICP autosampler.

 Reagents and Consumable Materials
     • ammonium oxalate, (NHJaC2O4.H8O,  crystals, reagent grade.
     • oxalic acid, H2C204-HZ0, crystals, reagent grade.

                                              oonform to
Calibration and Standardization

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
                                                               14
                                                               2.1
                                                               May 22, 1995
                                                               4 of 7
the high and one in the tow part of the operating range.

wav^S^^^
Al and an air/acetylene flame is used for Fe.
 Procedure
 Step 1 -
   Onto tared, glazed weighing paper, weigh 0.250 g of air-dried soil,  ground to pass
   through a 0.5 mm (35 mesh) sieve.
 Step 2 -
 Step 3 -
 Step 4 -
 Step 5 -
 Step 6.-
   helps to prevent enhanced Al results.
   Transfer soil to a labelled, 15 ml disposable tube.
   Using the dispenser, add 10 mL acid ammonium oxalate solution to each tube.
   Cap tubes and shake at low speed on a reciprocating shaker for four hours in the dark.
   Remove tubes from shaker and centrifuge at 2500 rpm until clear.
    Decant supernatant into clean, labelled disposable tubes.  Filter samples if sediment is
    present.
  Step 7 -   Analyze samples by AAS or ICP.
  Quality Control
  Precision
       One sample shou,d be anaiyzed ,„

  Accurscy


  Method Blanks
Three n,e,hod blanks, carried
                                         the
                                                                   * each blank snou* be

-------
                                                         Chapter:
                                                         Version:
                                                         Date:
                                                         Page:
                                              14
                                              2.1
                                              May 22, 1995
                                              5 of 7
 Quality Control Preparation Sample
                                            * resuits shouid be
                                                                               *•
     nAa!y\t^
 Accuracy of the QCPS should be within i : 10% of the^nn t«™ J«9 D"! between-run precision.
 be determined by analyzing the QCPS and cataiStinn 5KS^i ?•  ^ Between-"« Precision can
 Quality Control Check Standard
 Suggested Hun Format
                                                           i
 QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS
 QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
 QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
 QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS
      where:  QCCS
              MB
              QCPS
              DUP
              SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
Calculations and Reporting
                    Fe
                                   n in solution x -in mi
                              (250 mg soil x 1000 jug/mg)
                            Al
               in solution
                              (250 mg soil x 1000 //g/mg)
                                                  ml x 100

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
14
2.1
May 22,1995
6 of 7
References

Aflrteulture Canada. 1984. Analytical Methods
     Research Institute. Ottawa, Ontario. LRRI

Alexander E.B. 1974. Extractable iron in relation to soil age on terraces along the Truckee River,
     Nevada. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 38:121-124.
      Pennsylvania.

 Baril R  and G. Brttton. 1967. Anomalous values of free iron in some Quebec soite containing
     ' magnetite. Can. J. Soil Sci. 47:261.
                       ^
 Johnson, D.W., and D.E. Todd. 19.83 Relationships among iron, aluminum, carbon, and sulphate ,n
       a variety of forest soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 47.792-800.

 McKeague, J.A., and J.H. Day. 1966. Dithionite and oxalate-ext ractabte Fe and AJ as aids in
       differentiating various classes of soils. Can. J. Soil Sci. 46.13-22.

  Neary A.J  and S.R. Barnes. 1993. The effect of sample grinding on extractable iron and aluminum
       in soils. Can. J. Soil Sci. 73:73-80.

  Parfitt  R.L, and R.S.C. Smart. 1978. The mechanism of sulf ate, adsorption on iron oxides. Soil
       Sci. Soc. Am. J. 42:48-50.

  Raian S S S 1978. Sulf ate adsorbed on hydrous alumina, ligands displaced, and changes in surface
       charge. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 42:39-44.
        Soc. Am. J. 45:645-649.
        84:194-204.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Daite:
                                                               Page:
14
2.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 7
Schwertmann, U. 1973. Use of oxalate for Fe extraction from soils. Can. J. Soil Sci  53-244-246

                                                               so^in some acw f°re
                                     ite °" OXalat6- and djtni«nite-extractable iron. Soil Sci.

-------
                                                       Chapter:
                                                       Version:
                                                       Date:
                                                       Page:
15
2.1
May 22, 1995
1 of 10
                        Organic Iron and Aluminum


Introduction





















 a negative influence on SO/" adsorption (Johnson and Todd, 198,3).





 " 8* sus«pS ,o fcWeation, the measurement of this fraction is necessary.
      Since this is expected to be a relatively su-ble parameter, this measurement need oply be done

  initially to help characterize the soil.
  Review of Methods


-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
15
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 10
  the possible modification of the extracted humic substances, although some evidence has been
  presented to refute this argument.  Smith and Lorimer (1964) found that the fulvic acid extracted by
  ,  ^*H3d. I81!"!13' comP°sition to that extracted by water.  Similarly, Schnitzer and Skinner (1968)
  found that the f ulvic acid removed by 0.5 N NaOH and 0.1 N HCI had similar elemental compositions
  Hayes (1985), on  the  other hand,  found that strong alkali and associated  chemical oxidation
  destroyed organic matter.

       Neutral salts of mineral or organic acids have also been used, however, their success depends
  upon the ability of their anions to interact with the cations in combination with humic material in the
  soil.  Bremner and Lees (1949) tested the sodium salts of eight inorganic acids, ten organic acids
  as well as NaOH and NaCO3.  They concluded that Na-pyrophosphate (Na4P2O7)" was the best in
  providing  a mild but reasonably efficient extractant.  They recommend a concentration of at least
  0.1 M. Below this minimum concentration, yield varies with concentration and results in decreased
  6  ^nC£^hnitZ8r 6t a'" (1958) alS° fOUnd that Na«P*°7 
-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
15
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 10
were commonly slightly higher. Schuppli et al., (1983) experimentedon Canadian •""repml
using high speed centrifugation, Superfloc + tow speed centrifugat.cn, and both of the above with
ultrafiltration.  In the tropical soils, Superfloc + low speed centrifuging removed all the Al silicates
but concentrated goethite in the remaining suspended material.  Similar results were obtained with
high speed centrifugation but with less goethite.  .This effect was not nearly as pronounced in the
Canadian soils.  They concluded that high speed centrifugation or tow speed cen r.fugation  +
Superfloc alone (without ultrafiltration) was adequate for most temperate region so.ls. Ultraf iltration
seems most suited to laboratories not equipped with a high speed centrifuge. To date, the form
of  Fe and  Al remaining in ultracentrifuged or  ultrafiltered samples has not been  adequately
characterized.

      The pH of  the extracting solution has been of some concern to analysts. If maintaining the
integrity of the humic material is necessary for the identification of the^organics, an alkaline solution
such as unbuffered Na4P2O, may not be suitable. Bremner and Lees (1949) speculated that,.order
to decrease the  potential alteration of proteins, the pH of the extractant should be 7  Data compiled
from a series of studies shows the pH 7 method to be  superior for minimizing the alteration of
humic substances (Hayes, 1985). Kononova (1966) also recognized the need to adjust  the phTto 7
but recommended that because the efficiency of the extractant, for humic acids espeaally, is better
 at  a higher pH,  a pH of 9 should.be used. Certainly, if one's primary interest is the measurement
 of  organic Fe and Al, rather than the characterization of the organics, a higher pH  ,s probably
 suitable. A comparison performed by the Ontario Ministry of the Environment founcI that the Fe and
 Al  extracted at pH 10 with 0.1 M Na4P2O7 correlates better with organic C than 0.1 M Na4P2O7 at  pH
 7 or 0.01 M Na4P2O7 at pH 7.

      Adopted standard methods in Canada, the U.K. and the U.S. involve the use of 0.1 M Na4P2O7
 at pH 9.6 or 10 with either high speed centrifugation or the addition of Superftoc + tow speed
 centrifugation.  Of these methods, Loveland and Digby (1984) report that Na4P2O7 at pH 10 with high
 speed centrifugation (20,000 rpm) is a more consistent treatment, particularly for Al.

      • The Canadian and U.K. methods use samples  ground to less than 0.5 mm whereas the U.S.
 EPA methods (Blume et al., 1990) use a larger sample aliquot and  the less than 2 mm sample. In
 order to obtain a representative sample,  it  is suggested that if less than one gram of sample is
 chosen for extraction, the sample should be ground to  less than 0.5 mm prior to •**£"•
 Overwinding must be avoided.   The extracts  may be analyzed by erther atomic absorption
 spectrophotometry (AAS) or by inductively coupled plasma optical emission spectroscopy (ICP-OES).
  Reference Method

       The reference extraction method for the removal of organically-bound Fe and Al from soil is
  treatment with 0.1M Na4P2O7 unbuffered or at pH 10. Centrifuging at 20,000 rpm ^6™m™"d*°>
  although Superftoc + low speed centrifugation (with ultrafiltration optional)  maybe usedL as rt is
  recognized that not all laboratories are equipped with a high speed centrifuge. This method was
  chosen for the following reasons:

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                                                          15
                                                                          2.1
                                                                          May 22, 1995
                                                                          4 of 10
       •  the efficiency of the alkaline extraction for humic material,

       •  identification of the humic substances is not required,

       •  the results of previous work indicating its usefulness for the approximate differentiation

                                solls (McKea9ue e< +•  ** a"d «^**^«
          Adoption of this method by the Canadian, USDA, and British soil classification systems.
  that
  ^increase.
                            (Sh3king)
                                           iS Su99ested since Bremner and Lees (1949) found

                                          materia' 6XtraCted (as ™asured b* <*'«"* N) does
 Summary of Method
      lfJmpl8 °f au~dried S0ll> 9round to less tnan °'5 mm- is ^ighed into a plastic centrifuge
         d    Pyr0ph°SPhate solution <°'1 M at PH 10) is added, the tube is capped
         rf                                            -      -        , is cemrifge
        speed for 15 rmnutes.  Alternatively, 0.5 mL of 0.1% Superfloc s added and the tub? is

           hrou^ T? ** 15 ^ minUt6S " """ SO'Uti°nS " *-'  Turbid "rnptes should
          ICP 9       ^ membrane filter Ir°n 3nd a'Uminum are dete^™d in the supernatant
 Interferences and Shortcomings
 mavc                                            n9 an  reSU8  lJild-up on the *»"* head
 may occur. This may be alleviated somewhat by the aspiration of large amounts of deionized water
 (D II between samples. Alternatively, samples may be diluted prior to analysis (Fe and Al tevete

 ^^                       (aVaiIabte °" S°me inst— ^ « d^ted with HNO3
                                             mat-matChed caption standards and QC
of Surno  H                  " S3mpleS are turbld High "P"*1 <*ntrifuging or the addition
of Superfloc and low speed centnfuging is required to obtain extracts which are free of suspended
nrn*         t '* is ^^ that a Iar96 amount «* ** F« and AJ extracte(i by this method is in the
organic form, it is possible that other forms of iron and aluminum may be extracted by this method
The results can, therefore, only be used for the approximate differentiation of organic Fe and Al

                                                                                     n

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
15
2.1
May 22, 1995
5 of 10
Safety

     No specific hazards are associated with this procedure or with the required reagents. Normal
laboratory safety practices are to be observed.  Protective clothing and safety glasses should be
worn when handling concentrated HNO3 or H^PO, or NaOH. Standard safety precautions should be
observed when analyzing samples using a nitrous oxide/acetylene flame.



Apparatus  and Equipment

     • centrifuge tubes, plastic 50 mL, Oak Ridge type, screw closure.

     • screw caps to fit centrifuge tubes.

     • tube rack to hold centrifuge tubes.

     • tubes to fit AAS or ICP autosampler.

     • spatula.

     • glazed weighing paper.

     • dispenser, capable of accurately dispensing 30 mL of liquid.

     • reciprocating shaker, Eberbach, end-over-end shaker, or equivalent.

     • centrifuge with head to hold 50 mL tubes (preferably capable of attaining a speed of 20,000
       rpm or 510 X G.  This is not mandatory, as a speed of 2000 rpm may be used with the
       addition of Superftoc).

      • balance, accurate to 0.001  g.

      • pH meter.

      • 0.1 pm  membrane filters and filter apparatus (optional).
 Reagents and Consumable Materials

      • sodium pyrophosphate (Na4P2O7), anhydrous reagent grade powder or Na4P2O7"

      • nitric acid (HNOg), concentrated, reagent grade.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Dalte:
                                                               Page:
15
2.1
May 22, 1995
6 of 10
       • Superfloc (N-100) only required if a high speed centrifuge is not available. Two known
         sources for this product are: Cyanamid of Canada, Montreal, Quebec or from the American
         Cyanamid Co. of Wayne, New Jersey, U.S.A.

       • water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
         I reagent grade water (ASTM,  1984).


       • sodium hydroxide (NaOH), 0.1 M solution or phosphoric acid (H3POJ as required to adjust
         the pH of the pyrophosphate to 10.


       • sodium pyrophosphate solution, 0.1 M-Into a one  litre volumetric fllask, weigh out 26.59 g
         anhydrous Na4P2O7, oven dried and cooled in a desiccator (44.61 g if using Na4P2O,»10H O)
         Dissolve in DI water and dilute to one litre.  Adjust to pH 10 with NaOH or H PO .    *  "
 Calibration and Standardization


      Within each class of  instruments (AAS and ICP), the calibration procedure varies slightly
 Calibrate by analyzing a calibration blank (0 mg/L standard) and a series of at least three additional
 standards within the linear range of the instrument.  If an ICP is used, a multi-element standard
 may be prepared and analyzed. For AAS determinations, the instrument must be calibrated for each
 anaiyte by using a separate standard. The concentration of standards should bracket the expected
 sample concentration; however, the linear range of the instrument should not be exceeded
                                                                  i

      Prepare calibration standards so that the final concentration of N:a4P2O7 in the standards is
 equal to that of the  sample  extracts.  It is advisable to have two quality control solutions one in
 the high and one in the tow part of the operating range.

      To correctly set-up the  AAS,  refer to  the operating manual for the instrument.  Optimal
 wavelengths are: 309.3 rim for Al and 248.3 r,m for Fe. A nitrous oxide/acetylene flame is used for
 Al and an air/acetylene flame is used for Fe.
 Procedure


Step 1 -    Onto tared, glazed weighing paper,  weigh 0.300 g  of air-dried soil, ground to pass
           through a 0.5 mm (35 mesh) sieve.

           NOTE: It is advisable to sieve out the naturally less than 0.5 mm fraction first and then
           grind the remaining sample aliquot to pass through the 0.5 mm sieve.  This eliminates
           undue grinding of the naturally less  than 0.5 sample and helps prevent enhanced Al
           results (Neary and Barnes, 1993).                          \

Step 2 -    Transfer into a labelled 50 mL plastic centrifuge tube.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
                                                               15
                                                               2.1
                                                               May 22,1995
                                                               7 of 10
Step 3 -

Step 4 -


Step 5 -
Step 6 -
Using the dispenser, add 30 mL of 0.1 M Na4P2O7 extracting solution to each tube.

Cap tubes and shake overnight on a reciprocating shaker at tow speed or on an end-
over-end shaker at 40 to 50 rpm.

Remove tubes from shaker. Uncap tubes and centrifuge at 20,000 rpm for 15 minutes.
Alternatively, add 0.5 mL of 0.1% Superfloc solution to the sample and centrifuge at 1500
for 15 to 30  minutes or until clear. Filter any turbid" samples through 0.1 pirn membrane
filters.

Carefully decant supernatant into labelled 15 mL disposable tubes. Acidify extracts with
3 drops of concentrated nitric acid and let samples sit overnight allowing any suspended
matter to settle.
 Step 7 -   Analyze for Fe and Al by AAS or ICP.
 Quality Control

 Precision

      One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To eliminate bias
 due to position in the run, the routine  sample duplicate should be analyzed separately within the
 analytical run.   Within-run precision  is determined from duplicates based on relative percent
 difference between the samples at an  acceptance limit of a RPD * 10%.

      Between laboratory precision can be determined by analyzing the Agriculture Canada ECSS
 round-robin samples.

 Accuracy

      Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM). Acceptable limits
 for accuracy should be ±10% from the  known concentration of the standard or within the accuracy
 windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

  Method Blanks

       Three method blanks, carried through the extraction procedure, are analyzed with each batch
  of samples for each cation to measure potential contamination. Method blanks should be run at
  the beginning, middle, and end of each analytical run.  The concentration of each blank should be
  less than or equal to the instrument detection limit. All results should be blank corrected us.ng the
  mean of the acceptable method blank readings.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                                 15
                                                 2.1
                                                 May 22, 1995
                                                 8 of 10
  Quality Control Preparation Sample

       A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCF'S) should be analyzed once
  per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run precision
  Accuracy of the QCPS should be within t 10% of the long-term mean. Between-run preclstor,can
  tfvJurJTtiri* ^ **"? ^KQCP? 3nd calculatin9 t^ cumulative long-term standard deviation.
  If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard
  dev.at.ons, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.

  Quality Control Check Standard

      A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
  samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. The QCCS should contain all the analytes
  of interest with mid-calibration range concentrations.  Quantified values of the QCCS should be
  within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

      It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample  t*. consistent through time
 so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems  If
 analyzed  values deviate from  the long-term mean by more than three standard deviations  'the
 instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

 Suggested Run Format

 QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
 QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
 QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
 QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.
       where:  QCCS
               MB
               QCPS
               DUP
               SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
Calculations and Reporting
     If a chart recorder is used, peak heights are measured in mm from a baseline drawn between
peaks. Calculate Fe and Al concentrations, accommodating for sensitivity changes throughout the
run, blank values and dilution factors. Results are reported as % Fe and ;M in the soil. Results are
reported to two significant figures.
                         (%) = Fe (uo/mL) in solution x 3Q ml x 100 ''
                                 (300 mg soil x 1000

-------
                                                          Chapter:
                                                          Version:
                                                          Date:
                                                          Page:
                                      15
                                      2.1
                                      May 22, 1995
                                      9 of 10
                         (%) = Al ffjg/mU in solution x 30 mL x 100
                                (300 mg soil x 1000
References
     Pennsylvania.
                                     ^^
      Soil Sci. 60:141-143.

 Bascomb, C.L 1968. Distribution of pyrophosphate extractable iron and organic C in soils of various
      groups. J. Soil Sci. 19:251-268.



      Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Las Vegas, NV. EPA/600/4-90/023.


                                 •                       ":
a
                                                           ssat
       and Sons, New York. 692p.

  Hu^te. A.a, ami J.G. McCoH. 1984. Soil cation ,ea=Mn9 by -acHd rain- w«h varying nr,ra,e:su,fa,e

       ratios. J. Envir. Qual. 13:366-371.
         ...

        exlraols of some soil horizons. Geoderma 26:95-105.

-------
            Chapter:
            Version:
            Date:
            Page:
                                                                         15
                                                                         2.1
                                                                         May 22. 1995
                                                                         10 of 10
Kononova. M.M. 1966. Soi. Organic Matter. Perma8on Press. Inc..
          New York. 544p.

         of forms



                         and a,umlnum
                         °n«arto (Ores,
"9ands dlsplaced'
                               . SC«

                       peat Can. J.

-------
                                                      Chapter:
                                                      Version:
                                                      Date:
                                                      Page:
16
2.1
May 22, 1995
1of 7
                        Iron and Aluminum Oxides

Introduction
                    be done once to help character,* the so.l.
 Review of Methods











 is the optimum pH for extraction.




 method were comparable to the ^'^e^yn^i^d^rniBht shaking with citrate-
                                           ™ Canada adopted the USDWCS me,hod as
  their standard procedure.                                 t






  identified.
       Samp«e extracts may be analyzed by either atornta ^bsorptton

-------
                                                              Chaptor:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
16
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 7
   Reference Method


















      The sample extracts may be analyzed for Fe and Al by either ICP or MS.

 Summary of Method






 Interferences and Shortcomings






                                    iS USed'  '"atrix-matched ca.ibration standards and QC
                        °f Fe and MJro^ silicates fay the citrate-dithionite extraction is generally
                         W^r< rt should.be noted that ^is extractant also removes organic Fe
               ,         ,xides 9°ntent is desired, the pyrophosphale-actractable Fe and /S
rSu« a     I- **, ! "l^J and subtracted from the results of this analysis. In this casethe
results are also subject to the inherent limitations of the pyrophosphate tachnique

-------
                                                          Chapter:
                                                          Version:
                                                          Date:
                                                          Page:
16
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 7
Safety
     No specific hazards are associated with this procedure or with the required reagents  Normal


analyzing samples using a nitrous oxide/acetylene flame.


Apparatus and Equipment

     • plastic centrifuge tubes, 50 mL, with screw caps.

     • dispenser, capable of accurately dispensing 25 mL

     • reciprocating shaker (Eberbach or equivalent) or end-over-end shaker (40-50 rpmj.

     • spatula.

     • glazed weighing paper.

     • tubes to fit AAS or ICP autosampler,

     • tube racks to hold 50 mL centrifuge tubes and AAS autosampler tubes.

     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.


 Reagents and Consumable Materials

      • sodium dithionite (hydrosulphite) (Na2SaOJ, reagent grade.

      • sodium citrate (Na3C6H5O7-2H2O), reagent grade.

      • nitric acid (HNCg, concentrated, reagent grade.
        Cyanamid Co. of Wayne, New Jersey, U.S.A.

      • water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
        I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).
                                                                  dissolve 200 grams of
     -  . sodium citrate solution (0.68 M)-In a one litre
        NaaCeH5O7-2H20 in DI water.  Dilute to volume with DI water.


  Calibration and Standardization                   -

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Oalte:
                                                               Page:
                                                                           16
                                                                           2.1
                                                                           May 22, 1995
                                                                           4 of 7
  Procedure
 Step 2 -
 Step 3 -
 Step 4-
                  11 ls 'dy1?3*118 t° sie» out the naturally less than 0.5 mm fraction first and then

           Transfer weighed sample to a labelled 50 mL plastic centrifuge tube.
           Using the dispenser, add 25 mL of 0.68 M sodium citrate solution.
           Using a calibrated scoop, add 0.4 g of sodium dithionite.
                                                         — « at taw speed, or on an end-
Step 6 -
Step 7 -
           Remove caps and centrifuge tubes for 15 minutes at 20,000 rpm  Alternatively add 0 5
           mL of 0.1% Superf loc solution to the sample and centrifuge J w5%£^*j^^
                           the suPernatar|t into tubes to fit autosampler of the AAS  Acidifv
                                 t
Step 9 -   Analyze samples by AAS or ICP.

-------
                                                      Chapter:
                                                      Version:
                                                      Date:
                                                      Page:
16
2.1
May 22,1995
5 of 7
Quality Control

Precision



difference between the samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD & 10%.

Accuracy


windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

Method Blanks




mean of the acceptable method blank readings.
 Quality Control Preparation Sample

 Quality Control Check Standard
 within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.






  Suggested Run Format

  QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
  QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
  QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
  QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.

-------
                                                               Chapteir:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
                                                 16
                                                 2.1
                                                 May 22, 1995
                                                 6 of 7
         where:   QCCS
                 MB
                 QCPS
                 DUP
                 SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
  Calculations and Reporting

  Deakslf 3Thea?«reSI.deAr,i^Sed'tpefkllei9hts are measured *" mm from a baseline drawn between



                      Fe (%) = Fe fua/mU in solution x 9s ml x 5 x  100
                                 (500 mg soil x 1000 Aig/mg)
                         (%) • Al toa/mLl in solution x 9$ ml. x 5 x 100
                                (500 mg soil x 1000 pg/mg)
 References
 Agriculture Canada 1984. Analytical Methods Manual 1984. B.H. Sheldrick (eel) Land Resource
      Research Institute, Ottawa, Ontario. LRRI Contribution NoTwSl            ^source

                      Jacksoa 1953- Iron oxide removal from soils ancl
                 for JestVn9 and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11 01
                            °' ^^^ Wat6r< D1193'77 fr^P"^ 1983)- ASTM, ?niladelPhia,
          r            ' and S>C; Fang' 1964' Iron or al"minum coatings in relation to suifate
      adsorption characteristics of soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 28:632-<}35.
      h^ I--W. Zelazny, and DC. Martens. 1981. Effect of photolytte oxalate treatment on soil
      hydroxy-mterlayered vermiculites. Clays and Clay Min. 29:429-434.

Jackson M.L 1956. Soil Chemical Analysis-Advanced Course published by the author, Dept. of
      Soils, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. 991 p.
                                                       •         i
                              aluminum
                                                                             su"ate in
Lazerte, B. 1989. Aluminum speciation and organic carbon in waters of Central Ontario In
     Chefsea  Ml p^QsSoT"1*1 Chemistry and Tojdcoto9y °* Aluminum, Chapt. 1.  Lewis Pub.,

Mehra, O.P. and M.L Jackson. 1960. Iron oxide removal from soils and clays by a dithionite-citrate
     32T151!? fe M*ith ,S°dJium bicarbonate- Proceedings of the 7th National ConfertSS of
     Clays and Clay Minerals. Permagon Press, New York. pp. 317-327.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
13
2.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 7
Neary, A.J., and S.R. Barnes. 1993. The effect of sample grinding on extractable iron and aluminum
     in soils. Can. J. Soil Sci. 73:73-80.

Neary AJ  E. Mistry, and L Vanderstar. 1987. Sulphate relationships in some central Ontario forest
     soils. Can. J. Soil Sci. 67:341-352.

Raad, AT., R. Protz, and R.L Thomas. 1969. Determination of Na-dithionite and NH4-oxalate
     extractable Fe, Al and Mn in soils by atomic absorption spectroscopy. Can. J. Soil Sci.
     49: 89-94.

Rajan, S.S.S. 1978. Sulfate adsorbed on hydrous alumina, ligands displaced, and changes in surface
     charge. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 42:39-44.
                                                                          *
Schwertmann, V. 1964. Differenzierung der Eisenoxide des Bodens durch extraktion mit
     ammoniumoxalat-Losung. Zeischrift fur Pflanzenernah rung Dunfung Bodenkunde 105:194-202.

Sheldrfck, B.H., and J.A. McKeague. 1975. A comparison of extractable Fe and Al data using  methods
     followed in the U.S.A. and Canada. Can. J. Soil Sci. 55:77-78.

Singh, B.a 1984. Sulfate sorption by acid forest soils: 2. Sulfate adsorption isotherms with and
      without organic matter and oxides of aluminum and iron. Soil Sci. 138:294-297.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
17
2.1
May 22, 1995
1of 8
                         Phosphate Extractable Sulphate
 Introduction
      Sulphur, in the form of sulphate (SO/), is the principal anion in acidic: deposition in eastern
 North America.  Concern over the long-range transport and deposition of SO/ in precipitation has
 lead to increased monitoring of the sulphur status of soils.  In most mineral soils, the majority of
 extractable S is in the SO/ form.  In contrast, in organic horizons up to 50% of the total extractable
 S may be organically-bound (Maynard et al., 1987). The ability of soils to adsorb sulphate is one
 of the principal factors affecting the rate and extent of soil and watershed response to acidic
 deposition.  Quantification  of existing  pools  of adsorbed sulphate on a soil,  concurrent with
 measurements  of  sulphate adsorption capacity  of  that  soil,  provide useful  information  for
 understanding the status and for predicting the future response of the soil to acidic deposition. The
 measurement of extractable sulphate is, therefore, suggested for terrestrial monitoring programs
 such as LRTAP.                                                                         '
 Review of Methods

      The preparation and storage of soils is important in the determination of extractable SO/ in
 soils.  Several studies have shown that drying significantly altered the SO/ content of the soil,
 particularly in organic horizons (Peverill et al., 1975; David et al., 1982; Ssarle and Sparling, 1987).
 Moreover, storage of air-dried samples at room temperature (20 to 25° ID) for between 12 and 78
 weeks resulted in significant increases in SO/ concentrations (Maynard et al., 1987; Searle and
 Sparling, 1987). The increased sulphate concentrations observed were not consistent among soils.
 For  extractable SO/ measurements in organic horizons to be  meaningful, the test should be
 performed on field-moist samples. A representative sample can be obtained by mixingyhomogenizing
 the moist organic horizon prior to analysis.  The changes in SO/ concentration in mineral soils
 caused by drying  and storage were much less than organic soils.  For this reason and because of
 the  difficulty  in  obtaining a representative  sample from  moist samples, air-dried  soils  are
 recommended for the analysis of mineral soils.

     Numerous extractants have been proposed for the removal of SO/ from soils (Beaton et al.,
 1968; Tabatabai, 1982). Most of the experimental work has involved using mineral agricultural soils
 in an attempt to correlate extractable SO/ with plant growth and S uptake. Many of the techniques
 used on agricultural soils have been adapted for use on forest  soils.

   ^ Sulphate extraction methods in soils can be broken into two groups based on the fraction of
SO/ removed.  The two groups  include those extractants that remove readily soluble SO/ and
those extractants that remove readily soluble SO/ plus adsorbed SO/.  The extractants used to
remove readily soluble SO/ (H2O and weak salt solutions, such as CaClj, or NH4CI), are preferred
for organic and mineral soils containing no appreciable amounts of adsorbed SO/.  In contrast,

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
17
2.1
May 22,1995
2 of 8
phosphate extractants, generally employing a Ca(H2POJ2 solution (500 mg P/L), are recommended
for soils containing sesquioxides, allophane, or kaolinitic clays which have the potential to adsorb
   ^. The latter class of soils generally includes the mineral horizons of most forest soils.
     Eight extractants (including H2O, several weak salts, and Cafl^POJJ  were evaluated for
extractable SO,* on five forest organic soil horizons (Maynard et at., 1987). The most consistent
extractant for SO4* was 0.01 M NH4CI (1:10 soil to solution ratio), although all the weak salt
extractants remold similar amounts of SO.-.  Water as an extractant gave the most ^variabe
results. The phosphate extractant did not remove any more SO,2" in the orgamc soils and gave more
variable results than the NH4CI extractant. The strong phosphate solution was also noted to reduce
the life of the ion chromatography column.

      A phosphate extractant is preferred for mineral soils to ensure that strongly adsorbed SO,*
is extracted.  Calcium dihydrogen  phosphate (Ca^POJJ solution, containing  500 mg | P/L  is
preferred over Na or K phosphates since Ca enhances particle f locculation in clayey soils and makes
filtering more convenient.

      Over the last decade, the  development of ion chromatography (1C) and inductively coupled
 plasma atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES) have made the quantifi teat ion of S^and SO  rap,d
 and more accurate.  The determination of total S in a soil extract can be done by ICP-AES, but this
 technique is not specific for SO/". Ion chromatography is, however, specific to the SO4  ion (Dick
 and Tabatabai, 1979; Nieto-and Frankenberger, Jr., 1985; Maynard et al., 1987) and  ,s, therefore,
 preferred for sulphate quantification in soil extracts.
  Reference Method

       The reference method for the extraction of the readily soluble SO4* plus strongly adsorbed
  SO * phases from mineral soils employs a CafhLPOJ, extraction solution containing 500 mg P/L
  Sulphate in the extract is then quantified by ion chromatography.  This method is primarily for use
  in the determination of extractable sulphate contents in mineral soil horizons but may be used for
  the analysis of organic horizons.

  Summary of Method

       Air-dried mineral horizons which have been disaggregated and passed through a 2-mm sieve
  are extracted with Ca(H2POJ2 solution containing 500 mg P/L (2:20 air-dried soil to solution ratio)
  For oS«s, 'the but sample is homogenized in the field-moist state, pri or to£—
  of an aliquot for extraction with a Ca^POJ,  solution conta,n.ng 500 mg  P/L.  Sulphate in the
  extracts is determined by suppressor or single column ton chromatography.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
17
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 8
Interferences and Shortcomings

     The high levels of phosphate in the Ca(H2POJ2 extracts usually require adjustments to. the
eluent strength and instrument settings in order to provide a good separation between sulphate and
phosphate.  These adjustments may cause increased elution time for SO,*.  The column-life may
also be shortened by the use of strong P solutions.

     Colloidal material and certain organic compounds may interfere with the SO^ peak on the
chromatogram.  Membrane filtering  will help remove colloidal material and extend the life of the
guard cartridges.

     As  with other soluble  salts  in  soils, the  amount of SO,2"  extracted varies  with  the
soihextractant ratio. This ratio should, therefore, remain constant if samples are to be compared.

Safety

     Wear protective clothing (laboratory coat and gloves) and safely glasses  when preparing
reagents.  Follow the safety precautions of the manufacturer when operating instruments.
Apparatus and Equipment

     • ion chromatograph, pump and conductivity detector. Either suppressed ion chromatography
       (SIC) such as the Dionex models, or single column ion chromatography (SCIC) such as the
       Waters systems.

     • anion separator column and appropriate guard column.        i

     • automated sampler and injection system and sample vials or tubes to fit sampler.

     • data recording system, integrator or strip chart recorder.

     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.

     • reciprocal shaker.

     • vacuum filtration apparatus and funnels.

     • vacuum membrane filter apparatus (optional).

     • volumetric flask, 2 L

-------
                                                           Chapter:
                                                           Version:
                                                           Date:
                                                           Page:
17
2.1
May 22,1995
4 of 8
     • volumetric flask, 1 L

     • Nalgene bottles, 60 ml_


Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • calcium dihydrogen phosphate (Ca^OJ^O), reagent grade crystals.

     • sodium sulphate (Na2SOJ, reagent grade crystals.

     . water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
       I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • Cad^CX), extracting solution (500 mg P/L)~Weigh out 4.0(39 g C.O-tfOJ.-H.p into a 2 L
       volumetric flask. Dissolve in DI water and dilute to 2 L volume.

     • sulphate standard stock solution (1,000 mg SOJU-Wetfi 1-4790 g Na2SO4 (oven
       dried at 105' C and cooled in a desiccator) and transfer to a 1 L volumetric flask
       Dissolve in Ca(H2POJ2 extracting solution and dilute to one litre. Store refrigerated
       at 4° C.

      • working sulphate standards prepared from the stock solution to cover expected range of
       S? concentrations in sample extracts. Use CafltfOJ, extracting solution during d.lufon
       of the standard stock solution.

      • appropriate eluent for the 1C system and anion separator column used, (see manufacturer's
        recommendations).

      • filter paper, Whatman #42.

      • membrane filters, 0.45 pm (optional).
  Calibration and Standardization
       Follow the set-up procedures outlined in the manufacturer's operating manual for the specif to
 Mn^^T-M through the system and stabilize the baseline. Adjust the recorder unt.l
 Sote approximately 10% and the high standard is approximately 90% of the chart.

       Use a minimum of three standards plus a zero standard to calibrate the  system.  The

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Dat:e:
                                                              Page:
                                                                         17
                                                                         2.1
                                                                         May 22, 1995
                                                                         5 of 8
                                        Sh°Uld n0t ta exceeded-  T* calibratfon
                                                         fresh daiiy-
                                                                                   should
  Procedure

  Stepl-   Weigh 2.00 g of air-dried soil into a 60-mL Nalgene bottle.

  Step 2 -   Add 20 mL of Ca(H2POJ2 extracting solution to each bottle.

  Step3-   Shake for 1 h on a reciprocal shaker at 1 to 2 cycles per second.

                                    SUSpenslon usi"9 Whatman #™ filter paper in a Buchner
Step 5 -

Step6-
           NOTE: Alternately, samples may be centrifuged until the supernatant is clear.

           Vacuum filter the samples through 0.45 /urn membrane filters.!

           Analyze samples by ion chromatography within 24 hours.


                                    ° ** transferred into vials or tubes )iDeciffc to the type of
           NOTE:  Samples should be stored at 4° C prior to sample analysis.
 Quality Control

 Precision
                         *" analyZ6d in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To eliminate
                                r°Utine Sample duP|icate should
   feren      we                                       duplicates
difference between the samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD n 10%.

Accuracy

       Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference  material (SRM)  Acceotable
hrmts for accuracy shouW be ±10%  from the known concentration of the standard ' or^SS the
accuracy wndows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
                                              17
                                              2,1
                                              May 22,1995
                                              6 of 8
Method Blanks

       Three method blanks, carried through the extraction proceduire, are analyzed with each batch
of samples for each cation to measure potential contamination. Method blanks should be run at
the beginning, middle, and end of each analytical run.  The concentration of each blank should be
toss than or equal to the instrument detection limit. All results should be blank corrected using the
mean of the acceptable method blank readings.
 Quality Control Preparation Sample
       A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed
once per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run
precision   Accuracy of the QCPS should be within t 10% of the long-term mean.  Between-run
precision can be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term
standard deviation. If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the  long-term mean by more
than three standard deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and
quantification steps.                                                           ,
 Quality Control Check Standard
       A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
 samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. The QCCS should contain all the analytes
 of interest with mid-calibration range concentrations. Quantified values of the QCCS should be
 within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

        It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
 so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems.  If
 analyzed values deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard deviations, the
 instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

 Suggested Run Format
 »
 QCCS. MB. Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
 QCCS, Samples 9 to  16, MB, DUP,
 QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
 QCCS. Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.
        where:  QCCS
                MB
                QCPS
                DUP
                SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material

-------
                                                                Chapter:
                                                                Version:
                                                                Date:
                                                                Page:
17
2.1
May 22, 1995
7 of 8
  Calculations and Reporting
                     !0" ?f S°4* iS calculated bV read'"9 the peak area (or height) of the sample
                               n CUrVe"  ^ cateu'*ion program used shoukT take Into
                               the run as detected by the ln-run
       For mineral soils, calculate extractable sulphate concentrations as follows:

           Extractable SO,* (mg S/kg) = SO.* (molL) in solution x extract volume fmL)
                                                    dry soil weight (g)
 samDte                 ,                   mUSt * based on % molsture in the field-moist
 sample.  Therefore, the following formula is applicable:

          Extractable SO,* (mg S/kg) - SO,* fmo/Ll in solution x  a*, act volume fmLl
                                      (initial sample weight (g) x moisture correction)

      NOTE: The moisture correction factor is as follows with the moisture content presented as
             a fraction of the whole (e.g., 0.75):

           [(1 - moisture content in %) + (100 + moisture content in %)]
                                                                 i

 References

 American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards Vol 11 01
      Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia
      Pennsylvania.

 Beaton, J D., G.R. Burns, and J. Platou. 1968. Determination of sulphur in soils and plant material
      Technical Bull. No. 14. The Sulphur Institute, Washington, D.C.

 David. MB., MJ. Mitchell, and J.P. Narkus. 1982. Organic and inorganic sulfur constituents of a forest
      soil and their relationship to microbial activity. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:529-536.

Dick, W.A.. and MA Tabatabai. 1979. Ion chromatographic determination of sulfate and
     nitrate in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:847:852.

Maynard, D.G., Y.P. Kalra, and F.G. Radford. 1987. Extraction and determination of sulfur
     in organic horizons of forest soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 51:801-806.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
17
2.1
May 22, 1995
8 of 8
Nteto, K.F., and W.T. Frankenberger, Jr. 1985. Single column ton chromatography: I. Analysis of
     inorganic antons in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 49:587-592.

Peverill, K.I., G.P. Briner, and LA, Douglas. 1975. Changes in extractable sulphur and potassium
     levels in soil due to oven drying and storage. Aust. J. Soil Res. 13:69-75.

Searte, P.L, and G.P. Sparling. 1987. The effect of air-drying and storage conditions on the amounts
     of sulphate and phosphate extracted from a range of New Zealand topsoils. Cornm. Soil Sci.
     Plant Anal. 18:725-734.

Tabatabaf, MA 1982. Sulfur. In A.L Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis, Part 2. 2nd ed. Amer. Soc.
     Agronomy, Madison, WI. Agronomy 9:501-538.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                                                         18
                                                                         2.1
                                                                         May 22, 1995
                                                                         1of 8
                   Ammonium Chloride Extractable Sulphate
  Introduction
  North                  °f SU'Phate (S°^' iS the ***** anfon in 51cidic deposition in eastern
  North Amenca. Concern over the long-range transport and deposition of SO.2"
  eactabsin
  extractable S is in the SO4  form.  In contrast, in organic horizons up to i50% of the total extractabte
  S may be organically-bound (Maynard et al., 1987).  The ability of soils to adsorb sutohale is one
  dl±-tSriPft   S0'8 affeCtin9 ^ rate and 6Xtent °f S0il and waters'*d resiTe3 o ^S
  deposition.  Quant,f,cat,on of  existing pools of adsorbed sulphate on a soil  concurrent  with
  measurements of sulphate  adsorption capacity of that soil,  provide  useful wSSi S
           '                         '9 the f UtUre reSP°nse of ** «* to acidt CSn  iS
                                   '"S> theref°re' SU996Sted f°r terre«trial ^onitorin^p oghams!
  Review of Methods
 soils           uH          K   °f u°ilS JS imP°rtant in the dete^'nation of extractable SO* in
 soHs. Several stud,es have shown that drying significantly altered the SO,* content of the soil
 part,cularly ,n organic horizons (Peverill et al, 1975; David et al, 1982; Searto and SparHnfl 1987)'
 Moreover, storage of air-dried samples at room temperature (20 to &° C)  or bTtweS r3 f and 78

                           '                                                "
causd
                                    C0ncentrations observed ^re not consistent among soils.
                                   '" °r9an''C h°riZ°nS tO *»  "«*««, the test shou.d  be
                         mpleS> ArePresenta«ve sample can be obtained by mixing/homogenizing
                       "  "" tO ana'SiS'
 emed or th
 recommended for the analysis of mineral soils.
                                                                           mhe
                                          than °rganic S0ils' For this raason a"d because of
                                          samPte ^om  moist  samples,  air-dried soils  are
      "u™erous exfactants have been proposed for the removal of SO*1 from soils (Beaton et al
    ; Tabatabai, 1982).  Most of the experimental work has involved using mSS«£^^oi
in an attempt to correlate extractable SO4* with plant growth and S uptake. Many of thetcnniques
used on agncultural soils have been adapted for use on forest soils   • , .            tecnmques
SO -  emd      t                       " br°ken int° tw° 9rouPs based on *e fraction of
S04  removed.  The two groups include those extractants that remove readily soluble SO * and
those extractants that remove readily soluble SO,* plus adsorbed SO*.  The extractants used "o
remove readily soluble SO4* (H2O and weak salt solutions, such as CaCL or NH CO  a"e prefefreS
for orgamc and mineral soils containing no appreciable amounts of adsc r£d SO*  n contrast

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
18
2.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 8
phosphate extractants, generally employing a Ca(H2POJ2 solution (500 mg P/L), are recommended
for soils containing sesquioxides, allophane, or kaolinitic clays which have the potential to adsorb
SO,2". The latter class of soils generally include the mineral horizons of most forest soils.

     Eight extractants (including H2O, several weak salts, and Ca(H2PO,y  were evaluated for
extractable SO,2" on five forest organic soil horizons (Maynard et al., 1987). The most consistent
extractant for SO,2- was 0.01 M NH4CI (1:10 soil to solution ratio), although all the weak salt
extractants removed similar amounts of  SO,2".  Water as an extractant gave the most variable
results  The phosphate extractant did not  remove any more SO,2" in the organic soils and gave more
variable results than the NH4CI extractant. The strong phosphate solution was also noted to reduce
the life of the ton chromatography column.

      A phosphate extractant is preferred for mineral soils to ensure that strongly adsorbed SOf
is extracted.  Calcium dihydrogen  phosphate (Ca^PCgj  solution, containing 500 mg/L P,  is
preferred over Na or K phosphates since Ca enhances particle ftocculation in clayey soils and makes
filtering more convenient.

      Over the  last decade, the development of ion chromatography (1C) and inductively coupled
plasma atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES) have made the quantification of S and SO4  rapid
and more accurate.  The determination of total S in a soil extract can be done by ICP-AES, but this
technique is not specific for SO,2-.  Ion chromatography is, however, specific to the SO4  ion (Dick
 and Tabatabai, 1979; Nieto and Frankenberger, Jr., 1985; Maynard et al., 1987) and  is, therefore,
 preferred for sulphate quantification in soil extracts.
 Reference Method

      The reference method for the extraction of readily soluble SO,* from organic soils employs a
 001 M NH,CI extraction solution. Sulphate in the extract is then quantified by ion chromatography.
 This method is primarily for use in the determination of extractable sulphate contents in organic so.l
 horizons.

 Summary of Method

       Field-moist organic horizons are homogenized in a Waring blender and extracted with 0.01 M
 NH4CI (approx. 2:20 air-dried soihsolution). Sulphate in the extracts is determined by suppressor or
 single column ton chromatography.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Paige:
18
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 8
 Interferences and Shortcomings

      Colloidal material and certain organic compounds may interfere with the SO/ peak on the
 chromatogram.  Membrane  filtering will help remove colloidal material and extend the life of the
 guard cartridges.

      As with other soluble  salts in soils, the amount  of SO/  extracted varies with the
 soihextractant ratio. This ratio should, therefore, remain constant if samples are to be compared.

 Safety

      Wear protective clothing (laboratory coat and gloves) and safety glasses when preparing
reagents.  Follow the safety precautions of the manufacturer when opBrating instruments.


Apparatus and Equipment

     • ton chromatograph, pump and conductivity detector. Either suppressed ion chromatography
       (SIC) such as the Dionex models, or single column ion chromatography (SCIC) such as the
       Waters systems.                                                 •

     • anion separator column and appropriate guard column.

     • automated sampler and injection system and sample vials or tubes to fit sampler.

     • data recording system, integrator or strip chart recorder.

     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.

     • reciprocal shaker.                                        \

     • vacuum filtration apparatus and funnels.                    :

     • vacuum membrane filter apparatus (optional).

     • volumetric flask, 1 L
                                                              i

     • Nalgene bottles, 60 mL

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
18
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 8
Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • ammonium chloride (NH4CI), reagent grade powder.

     • sodium sulphate (Na^O^, reagent grade crystals.

     • water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
       I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • NH4Cl extracting solution, 0.01 M-Weigh out 0.5350 g NH4CI and transfer to a 1 L volumetric
       flask. Dissolve in DI and dilute to one litre.

     • sulphate standard stock solution (1,000 mg/L SOJ-Weigh 1.4790 g Na2SO4 (oven
       dried at 105° C and cooled in a desiccator) and transfer to a 1 L volumetric flask.
       Dissolve in NH4CI extracting solution and dilute to one litre. Store refrigerated at 4°
       C.

      • working  sulphate standards prepared from the stock solution to cover expected range of
       SO^ concentrations in sample extracts. Use NH4CI extracting solution during dilution of the
       standard-stock solution.

      • appropriate eluent for the 1C system and anion separator column used, (see manufacturer's
       recommendations).

      • filter paper, Whatman #42.

      • membrane filters, 0.45 pirn (optional).
 Calibration and Standardization

      Follow the set-up procedures outlined in the manufacturer's operating manual for the specific
 instrument.  Pump eluent through the system and stabilize the baseline.  Adjust the recorder until
 zero is approximately 10% and the high standard is approximately 90% of the chart.

      Use a minimum of three  standards plus  a  zero standard to calibrate the 
-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                                                           18
                                                                           2.1
                                                                           May 22, 1995
                                                                           5 of 8
  Procedure

  Step 1 -    Thaw sample if previously frozen.

  Step 2 -    Homogenize field moist sample in a Waring blender until visually homogeneous.

  Step 3 -    Weigh an aliquot of the f ield-moist soil that would approximate 2 g on a dry weight
            basis into a 60-mL Nalgene bottle.                                      ^    9
                     a^it;°"!l^lic'uot should *» P^ared for drying and determination of the %
           moisture so that SO,* can be calculated on a dry weight basis.

 Step 4 -   Add 20 mL of 0.01 M NH4CI extracting solution to each bottle.

 Step 5 -   Shake for 1 h  on a reciprocal shaker at 1 to 2 cycles per second.

                                   SUSpenslon usi"9 Whatman #42 filter paper in a Buchner
 Step 7 -

 Steps-
           NOTE:  Alternately, samples may be centrifuged until the supernatant is clear.

           Vacuum filter the samples through 0.45 /«n membrane filters.

           Analyze samples by ton chromatography within 24 hours.

                                   O *  transferred into vials or tubes specific to the type of
          NOTE: Samples should be stored at 4° C prior to sample analysis.
Quality Control

Precision
                te Sh°Uld "• ana|Vz0d in duplicate with each run of thinty samples  To eliminate
            °        h8 '""• *e r°Utlne S3mle dup"'Cate should ** analyzed
            we   *                              fr°m duplicates
difference between the samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD * 10%.
                                                                         relative

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
18
2.1
May 22,1995
6 of 8
Accuracy

       Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM).  Acceptable
limits for accuracy should be  ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the
accuracy windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

Method Blanks

       Three method blanks, carried through the extraction procedure, are analyzed with each batch
of samples for each cation to measure potential contamination.  Method blanks should be run at
the beginning, middle, and end of each analytical run. The concentration of each blank should be
IMS than orequal to ihe instrument detection limit.  All results should be blank corrected usmg the
mean of the acceptable 'method blank readings.

 Quality Control Preparation Sample

        A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed
 once per analytical run.  This sample is used to  monitor accuracy and long-term  between-run
 precision.  Accuracy of the QCPS should be  within ± 10% of the long-term mean.   Between-run
 precision can be determined by  analyzing the QCPS and calculating the  cumulate long-term
 standard deviation. If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more
 than three standard deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and
 quantification steps.

 Quality Control Check Standard

        A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
 samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. The QCCS should f"^^""^
 of interest with  mid-calibration range concentrations.  Quantified values of the QCCS should be
 within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

        It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
 so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other  potential problems If
 analyzed values deviate from the long-term mean by more than three standard dev.at.ons, the
 instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

  Suggested Run Format

  QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
  QCCS, Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
  QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
  QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.

-------
                                                                Chapter:
                                                                Versfoin:
                                                                Date:
                                                                Page:
                                                                 18
                                                                 2.1
                                                                 May 22, 1995
                                                                 7 of 8
         where:   QCCS
                  MB
                  QCPS
                  DUP
                  SRM
                quality control check standard
                method blank
                quality control preparation sample
                duplicate sample
                standard reference material
  Calculations and Reporting

          Extractable SO,2" (mg S/kg) = SO.2- frn0/n in solution x avtra,r*
                                      (initial sample weight (g) x moisture correction)
       N01E:
                                               foltows wiih the
[(1 - moisture content in %) + (100 + moisture content in
                                                               %)]
 References

 American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards Vol
 Beaton , do  G.R. Burns, and J. Platou. 1968. Determination of sulphur in soils and plant material
      Technical Bull. No. 14. The Sulphur Institute, Washington, D.C.                   maieriai.
          nH             u'P- NarkUS< 1982' Organic and Inor9anic sulfur constituents of a forest
     soil and their relationship to microbial activity. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:529-536.

Dick, W A, and M.A, Tabatabai. 1979. Ion chromatographic determination of £ ulfate and
     nitrate in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:847:852.

Maynard, D.G., Y.P. Kalra, and F.G. Radford. 1987. Extraction and determination of sulfur
     in organic horizons of forest soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 51:801-806.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
18
2.1
May 22, 1995
8 of 8
Nfeto, K.F., and W.T. Frankenberger, Jr. 1985. Single column ion chromatography: I. Analysis of
     inorganic antons in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 49:587-592.

Peverill, K.I., GP. Briner, and LA. Douglas. 1975. Changes in extractable sulphur and potassium
     levels in soil due to oven drying and storage. Aust. J. Soil Res. 13:69-75.

Searle P L and G P Sparling. 1987. The effect of air-drying and storage conditions on the amounts
     J^S^^o^ extracted from a range of New Zealand topsoi.s. Comm, So,. Sa.
     Plant Anal. 18:725-734.

Tabatabai, MA 1982. Sulfur. In A.L Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis, Part 2. 2nd ed. Amer. Soc.
      Agronomy, Madison, WI. Agronomy 9:501-538.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
19
1.1
May 22, 1995
1of 8
                            Water Extractable Sulphate
  Introduction

  Review of Methods

      The preparation and storage of soils is important in the determination of extractable SO * in
 ££ ,  ,    StUdl6S ^ Sh°Wn that dfyin9 Si9"^ant.y altered the SO ? ^3^ the so"
 part,cularly ,n orgamc horizons (Peverill et al., 1975; David et al., 1982; Sear te a~d SparHna 1987?'
 Moreover, storage of air-dried samples at room temperature (20 to 25° Q f I tetwee ^12 aid 78




                                                from  moist

                                                 ^
those extractants that remove readily soluble SO/ plus adsorbed SO/  The Lractants used to
remove read.ly soluble SO/ (HaO and weak salt solutions, such as S(^ « (JSS^ pSS£
for organ,c and mineral soils containing no appreciable amounts of adsorbe  SO *   n contrast

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
19
1.1
May 22, 1995
2 of 8
phosphate extractants, generally employing a OOtfOJ. solution (500 mg
foTsoils containing sesquioxides, allophane, or kaolinitic clays wh,ch have the potonbaT to adsorb
    . The latter class of soils generally include the mineral horizons of most forest so.ls.
     Eight extractants (including H2O, several weak salts, and Ca^POJJ were evaluated for
extractabte SO * on five forest organic soil horizons (Maynard et al., 1987).  The most cons.stent
eSracant for So" wls 0.01  M NH4CI (1:10 soil to solution ratio), although all the weak salt
SSSl^Sid^nltar amounts of W  Water as an extractant gave the <™*™*»
Results. The phosphate extractant did not remove any more SO.- in the orgamc so.ls ^ gave more
viable results than the NH4CI extractant. The strong phosphate solufon was also noted to reduce
the life of the ion chromatography column.

      A phosphate extractant is preferred for mineral soils  to ensure that strongly adsorbed SO£
is extracted.  Calcium  dihydrogen phosphate (Ca(H2POM  solution,  conta,n,ng 500 mg/L P  ,s
^rred over Na or K phosphates since Ca enhances particle f locculation ,n clayey so.ls and makes
filtering more convenient.
      Over the last decade, the development of ion chromatography (1C) and i
 plasma atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES) have made »a quaflMntion. of
 and more accurate.  The determination of total S in a soil extract can be done by
 technique is not specific for SO4*.  Ion chromatography is, however, specrf ,c to the
 and Tabatabai, 1979; Nieto and Frankenberger, Jr., 1985; Maynard et al, 1987) and ,s, therefore,
 preferred for sulphate quantification in soil extracts.
  Reference Method

                                  ssr
                                     ^
           for organic horizons bearing in mind the method limitations ,nd,cated .n the "Review of
  Methods" section.
  Summary of Method
       Air-dried mineral horizon samples, which have been disaggregated and passed through a 2-mm
  sieve arf exacted with deionized water  (1:20 air-dried soihwater).  Sulphate in the extracts »
  determined by suppressor or single column ion chromatography.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Varsion:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
19
1.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 8
Interferences and Shortcomings                         \

     Colloidal material and certain organic compounds may interfere with the SO,* peak on the
chromatogram. Membrane filtering will help remove colloidal material and extend the life of the
guard cartridges.

     As  with other soluble salts  in soils, the  amount  of SO^  extracted varies with the
soil:extractant ratio. This ratio should, therefore, remain constant if samples are to be compared.

Safety

     Wear protective clothing (laboratory coat and gloves) and safety glasses when preparing
reagents.  Follow the safety precautions of the manufacturer when operating instruments.


Apparatus and Equipment

     • ion chromatograph, pump and conductivity detector. Either suppressed ion chromatography
       (SIC) such as the Dionex models, or single column ion chromatography (SCIC) such as the
       Waters systems.

     • anion separator column and appropriate guard column.       •

     • automated sampler and injection system and sample vials or tubes- to fit sampler.

     • data recording system, integrator or strip chart recorder.

     • balance, accurate to 0.001 g.

     • reciprocal shaker.

     • vacuum filtration apparatus and funnels.

     • vacuum membrane filter apparatus (optional).

     • volumetric flask, 1 L

     • Nalgene bottles, 100 ml_.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
19
1.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 8
Reagents and Consumable Materials

     • sodium sulphate (Na2SOJ, reagent grade crystals.

     • water-DI water used in all preparations should conform to ASTM specifications for Type
       I reagent grade water (ASTM, 1984).

     • sulphate standard stock solution (1,000 mg/L SOJ-Weigh 1.4790 g Na2SO4 (oven
       dried at 105° C and cooled in a desiccator) and transfer to a 1 L volumetric flask.
       Dissolve in DI water and dilute to one litre.  Store refrigerated at 4° C. •

     • working sulphate standards prepared from the stock solution to cover expected range of
       SO,,2" concentrations in sample extracts.

     • appropriate eluent for the 1C system and anion separator column used, (see manufacturer's
       recommendations).

     • filter paper, Whatman #42.

     • membrane filters, 0.45 pm (optional).
 Calibration and Standardization

      Follow the set-up procedures outlined in the manufacturer's operating manual for the specific
 instrument.  Pump eluent through the system and stabilize the baseline.  Adjust the recorder until
 zero is approximately 10% and the high standard is approximately 90% of the chart.

      Use a minimum of three  standards plus  a zero standard to calibrate the system.  The
 standards are analyzed  and a calibration curve produced by plotting peak area or height against
 concentration. The concentration of standards should bracket the expected sample concentration;
 however, the linear range of the instrument should not be exceeded.  The calibration curve should
 be close to linear. Calibration standards should be prepared fresh daily.  Calibration standards
 should be prepared in the extraction solution, in this case DI water.

-------
                                                             Chapter:     19
                                                             Version:      1.1
                                                             Date:        May 22, 1995
                                                             Page:        5 of 8


 Procedure
                                                                ;i

 Step 1 -    Weigh 4.00 g of air-dried mineral soil into a 100-mL Nalgene bottle.

           NOTE:  If this method is to be used for an organic soil horizon, homogenize the sample
           in a Waring blender until visually homogeneous and weigh a 2.00 gram sample into the
           100-mL Nalgene bottle.

           NOTE:  An additional aliquot should be prepared for drying and determination of the %
           moisture so that SO*2" can be calculated on a dry weight basis.      '

 Step 2 -    Add 80 mL of  DI water to each bottle.

 Step 3-    Shake for 1 h on a reciprocal shaker at 1 to 2 cycles per second.

 Step 4 -    Vacuum filter  the resulting suspension using Whatman #42 filter paper in a Buchner
           funnel.

           NOTE:  Alternately, samples may be centrifuged until the su|Dernatant is clear.

 Step 5 -    Vacuum filter the samples through 0.45 /urn membrane fliters.

 Step 6 -    Analyze samples by ion chromatography within 24 hours.

           NOTE:  Samples may have to be transferred into vials or tubes specific to the type of
           sampler used.

           NOTE:  Samples should be stored at 4°  C prior to sample analysis.


 Quality Control

 Precision

       One sample should be analyzed in duplicate with each run of thirty samples. To  eliminate
bias due to position in the run, the routine sample duplicate should be analyzed separately within
the analytical run.  Within-run precision  is determined from duplicates based on  relative percent
difference  between the samples at an acceptance limit of a RPD **  10%

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
19
1.1
May 22, 1995
6 of 8
Accuracy

       Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM).  Acceptable
limits for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the
accuracy windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

Method Blanks

       Three method blanks, carried through the extraction procedure, are analyzed with each batch
of samples for each cation to measure potential contamination.  Method blanks 'should be run at
the beginning, middle, and end of each analytical run. The concentration of each blank should be
tess than or equal to the instrument detection limit.  All results should be blank corrected using the
mean of the acceptable method blank readings.
 Quality Control Preparation Sample
       A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed
once per analytical run.  This sample is used to monitor accuracy and long-term between-run
precision.  Accuracy of the QCPS should be within  ± 10% of the long-term mean.  Between-run
precision can be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term
standard deviation. If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the long-term mean by more
than three standard deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and
quantification steps.

 Quality Control Check Standard

       A quality control check standard (QCCS) should be analyzed at the beginning, after every ten
samples, and after the last sample of each analytical run. The QCCS should contain all the analytes
of interest with mid-calibration range concentrations. Quantified values of the QCCS should be
within ±10% of the known concentration of the standard.

       It is highly recommended that the concentrations of this sample be consistent through time
 so that control charts may be plotted to monitor laboratory bias and other potential problems.  If
 analyzed values deviate  from the long-term mean  by more than three standard deviations, the
 instrument is re-standardized and re-calibrated prior to any further sample analyses.

 Suggested Run Format

 QCCS, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPSt
 QCCS. Samples 9 to  16, MB, DUP,
 QCCS, Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
 QCCS, Samples 26 to 30, MB, QCCS.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Date:
                                                              Page:
                                                 19
                                                 1.1
                                                 May 22, 1995
                                                 7 of 8
       where:  QCCS
               MB
               QCPS
               DUP
               SRM
quality control check standard
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
Calculations and Reporting

     The concentration of SO/*" is calculated by reading the peak area (or height) of the samples
against the standard calibration curve.  The calculation program used should take into account
sensitivity changes throughout the run as detected by the in-run standard. All sample results are
method blank subtracted.

     For mineral soils, calculate extractable sulphate concentrations as follows:
          Extractable SO^ (mg S/kg) = SQf (mg/L) in solution x extract volume (mL)
                                                  dry soil weight (g)

     For organic samples, the sample weight must be based on % moisture in the field-moist
sample. Therefore, the following formula is applicable:

         Extractable SO4*" (mg Sykg) =  SO,2" (mg/L) in solution x extract volume (mL)
                                     (initial sample weight (g) x moisture correction)

     NOTE: The moisture correction factor is as follows with the moisture content presented as
            a fraction of the whole (e.g., 0.75):                    '•

           [(1 - moisture content in %) •*• (100 + moisture content in %)]
References

American Society for Testing and Materials. 1984. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.01,
     Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved 1983). ASTM, Philadelphia,
     Pennsylvania.

Beaton, J.D., G.R. Burns, and J. Platou. 1968. Determination of sulphur iin soils and plant material.
     Technical Bull. No. 14. The Sulphur Institute, Washington, D.C.

David, M.B., M.J. Mitchell, and J.P. Narkus. 1982. Organic and inorganic sulfur constituents of a forest
     soil and their relationship to microbial activity. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 4(3:529-536.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
19
1.1
May 22, 1995
8 of 8
Dick, W.A., and MA Tabatabai. 1979. Ion chromatographic determination of sulfate and
     nitrate in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:847:852.

Maynard, D.G., Y.P. Kalra, and F.G. Radford. 1987. Extraction and determination of sulfur
     in organic horizons of forest soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am, J. 51:801-806.

Nieto, K.F., and W.T. Frankenberger, Jr. 1985. Single column ion chromatography:  I.  Analysis of
     inorganic antons in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 49:587-592.

Peyerill, K.I., G.P. Briner, and LA. Douglas. 1975. Changes in extractable sulphur and potassium
     levels in soil due to oven drying and storage. Aust. J. Soil Res. 13:69-75.

Saarte, P.L, and G.P. Sparling. 1987. The effect of air-drying and storage conditions on the amounts
     of sulphate and phosphate extracted from a range of New Zealand topsoils. Comm. Soil Sci.
     Plant Anal. 18:725-734.

Tabatabai, MA  1982. Sulfur. In AL Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis, Part 2.2nd ed. Amer. Soc.
     Agronomy, Madison, WI. Agronomy 9:501-538.

-------
                                                              Chapter:
                                                              Version:
                                                              Dalle:
                                                              Page:
20
2.1
May 22, 1995
1of 6
                                     Total Sulphur
Introduction
     Sulphur is an essential element for all biological systems. Historically, its importance as a
plant nutrient and reports of widespread deficiencies, especially in sub-humid areas of intensive
leaching, has made it a routine measurement in some laboratories. Most of the sulphur in surface
soils occurs in combination with organic matter (Freney and Williams,  1983).  Inorganic SO^-S,
although it comprises a small fraction of the total S in most soils, is important to the cycling of S
in the soil.

     Concern over the long-range transport and deposition of SO^ in precipitation has lead to
increased monitoring of the sulphur status of soils.  The determination of total sulphur is useful for
characterizing relationships between inputs of sulphur from acidic deposition and soil sulphur pools.
Fundamental to studying the effects of strong acid precipitation on terrestrial and aquatic systems
is an understanding of the behaviour of sulphur in these systems. The measurement of total S is,
therefore, suggested for terrestrial monitoring programs.

                                                                 i
Review of Methods

     It has only been within the last 15 years that the difficulty of accurately measuring S in soils
has  been overcome.  Recent advances in analytical techniques have resulted in the accurate and
precise measurement of S in various types of soils (Dick and Tabatabai, 1979; Hogan and Maynard,
1984; Nieto and Frankenberger, Jr.,  1985;  Maynard et al., 1987).  Several methods are routinely used
for the determination of S in environmental samples. These may be divided into two groups, namely,
those involving wet oxidization of the sample and those which involve direct sample analysis (Hogan
and  Maynard, 1984).

     Methods available for the wet oxidation of organic materials are well documented (Beaton et
al., 1968;  Tabatabai, 1982;  Blanchar, 1986).  Acid and alkaline oxidation are the  most common
(Blanchar et al., 1965; Tabatabai and Bremner, 1970), as they are dependable, accurate and relatively
rapid (Blanchar, 1986).  Full recovery from an acid digestion usually requires the use of perchloric
acid. The danger associated with its use and the special facilities required have meant that, until
recently, acid digestions have been avoided. The recent adaptation of microwave ovens for use in
the laboratory has led to the development of microwave acid oxidation digestion techniques for
foliage  and soils which successfully  use hydrogen  peroxide  in place of perchloric acid.  Acid
digestions for the measurement of total  S in soils requires the use of hydrofluoric acid to destroy
the silicate matrix and ensure complete recovery of S. A HNO3-HCIO4-HF mixture is commonly used.
For this reason, many analysts  have preferred the safer, more  rapid, dry combustion techniques.

     The wet oxidation technique converts  S to SO/1" and produces a solution  which  can be
analyzed by a variety of methods.  Turbidimetry  is insensitive, lacks precision and is subject to
numerous interferences (Beaton et al., 1968). Colourimetric methods such as the methylene blue
technique (Technicon, 1972) also have limited application  in soils and plant analysis because of
interferences by major nutrient cations (Maynard et al., 1987). The colourimetric method developed
by Johnson and Nishita (1952) was found to be the most sensitive and accurate of the colourimetric
procedures. Ion chromatography has not been used extensively for the measurement of total S, but
has been shown to be an excellent method for the determination of SO42" and its companion anions,
as well as for cation determinations, in waters and soil extracts.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
20
2.1
May 22,1995
2 of 6
     Recent publications (Hogan and Maynard, 1984; White and Douthit, 1985; Novozamsky et al.f
1986) have shown that the accurate and precise measurement of S is possible by ICP-AES in a
range of environmental samples.  Precision is estimated at ± 2%. Results of analysis of NIST plant
material and sediments demonstrated that the precision and accuracy obtained by ICP-AES are
equal to or better than any other technique currently used. The ICP-AES has several advantages
over other methods. It is rapid, flexible, has a dynamic range, is free from interferences and permits
simultaneous multielement analysis.  These factors make it a preferred method of analysis for
laboratories possessing ICP-AES capabilities.

     Direct analysis  of the sample may be done by  combustion of the sample  at elevated
temperatures (generally at 1000° C or higher) and measuring the liberated SO, by an infrared
detector. Examples of instruments that combust the sample include the LECO combustion furnace,
Carla-Erba combustion furnace, or the Fisher S analyzer.  These methods require little or no sample
preparation for the determination of total S.

     Additionally, X-ray fluorescence (XRF) may be used to quantify soil S along with many other
elements. The method has been used to a lesser extent on soils than the aforementioned methods
(tabatabai and Bremner, 1975). The use of XRF technology is, however, a tedious, time consuming
process.  Sample preparation may include sample fusion into a borate glass disk or pressing the
sample into a pellet under high pressure. Unfortunately, without fusion of the sample into a glass,
the natural variability in the sample matrix causes difficulty in obtaining representative standards
and can result in interelement interferences. Finally, the expense of the instrumentation makes this
method an unfeasible option for many laboratories.

     The LECO S analyzer was originally developed for the determination of S in steel, but because
of its simplicity, speed, and convenience, it has been adapted for use in soil and plant analysis
(Tabatabai, 1982).  An initial evaluation of this method by Tabatabai and Bremner (1970) showed
total S results to be unsatisfactory for research that required  accurate and precise determinations.
The Ontario Ministry of the Environment has found that the infrared detection system on the LECO
gave unacceptable results for highly organic soil samples.


Reference Method

     The reference method for total S in soil samples is dry combustion in a LECO sulphur analyzer
with infrared detection. The analysis of S by LECO-S analyzer has been chosen as a reference
method because it is widely used in North  America and has been used successfully by some
laboratories for both soil  and  foliage samples.  However, the  use of other manufacturer's
instruments for total sulphur determinations is acceptable.

Summary of Method

     An air-dried and finely ground soil sample is heated  with an accelerator to 1600° C in a stream
of  high purity oxygen. The  released sulphur is converted to sulphur dioxide and is detected by
infrared detector (Hem, 1984).

Interferences and Shortcomings

      Large amounts of carbon can  prevent proper ignition of the sample.   With incomplete
combustion, a poor recovery of S may be obtained.  This may be overcome by reducing the sample
size and adding LECO Iron Chip Accelerator plus tin. Preashing  of highly organic soils at 475 to
500° C for two  hours may be performed, but preliminary studies should be. done on the type of

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Daite:
                                                            Page:
20
2.1
May 22, 1995
3 of 6
 samples to be analyzed to determine whether a toss of S occurs during this ashing.  Preashed
 samples also require accelerator to overcome interference from residual carbon.
      Moisture deposits on the walls of the delivery tubes or the surface of the dust filter will absorb
 SOj. Tnismay be overcome by using magnesium perchlorate between the dust filter and the original
      Interferences from nitrogen may be overcome by increasing tlie oxygen flow rate to  1.5
 litres/minute.
 Safety
      Normal safety precautions should be taken when using high-tempeirature combustion furnaces.
      Protective clothing and safety glasses should be worn when handling reagents. Heat resistant
 gloves may be needed when placing samples in the furnace.  The furnace must be adequately
 vented and protected from human contact and combustible materials. Gias cylinders should  be
 bolted or chained in an upright position.
      Fumes of magnesium oxide are toxic. Magnesium perchlorate is a fire and explosion hazard
 if it comes in contact with organic materials.

 Apparatus and Equipment
      • Sulphur analyzer with infrared detector, LEGO model SC-132, or equivalent.
      • Balance, accurate to 0.001 g.
      • LEGO scoop.
                                                              j                .       :.
 Reagents  and Consumable Materials
      • Oxygen, high purity.
                                                              t
      • Compressed air, jf needed.
      • Anhydrous magnesium perchlorate (Mg(CIOJ2, 10-20 mesh, or equivalent desiccant specified
       by manufacturer for drying gases after combustion and prior to detection.
      • Magnesium oxide, MgO, reagent grade powder, tow in sulphur.
      • LEGO combustion boats, sulphur-free  and appropriate for use with the equipment used.
      • Accelerators, vanadium pentoxide, iron chips, and/or copper metal

 Calibration and Standardization                     t
     Set up the instrument according to the LECO operating manual. In general, the instrument
should be calibrated at least once a day or once per batch of samples, whichever is more frequent.

-------
                                                             Chapter:
                                                             Version:
                                                             Date:
                                                             Page:
20
2.1
May 22, 1995
4 of 6
Use either NIST (formerly NBS) reference materials or standards supplied by the manufacturer and
approved by the laboratory or QA manager.  The concentration range of the standards must  be
representative of the C concentrations expected in the soil samples.  A minimum of a two-point
calibration curve should be used. Use of a NIST standard reference material as an initial calibration
check is highly recommended.

     Some suggested calibration standards and reference samples include:   LEGO brand iron
powder (0.036% S), LEGO coal calibration standard (2.56% S), NIST (NBS) coal reference material
(1.89% S), SU-1A nickel-copper-cobalt ore (9.35% S), and CCU-1 reference material (35.4% S).

     Ensure that the anhydrone is dry and the dust filter is clean. Prior to analyzing samples, the
Instrument is conditioned by running low level calibration standards  until the results are stabilized
to within 5%. Once stable, three blank crucibles  (accelerator only) are analyzed followed by three
standards.


Procedure - Infra-red Detection

Step 1 -   Weigh out 0.250 g air dried and finely ground soil into a LEGO combustion boat.  Record
          sample weight.

Step 2 -   Preset power settings on induction furnace according to  the manual.

Step 3 -   Ignite the sample in the crucible for the suggested time period.  Seven minutes has been
          found to work well for soils  but this should be determined for the range of soil types
          specific to the laboratory.

Step 4 -   Take a sulphur measurement reading.
QualityControl

Precfsfon

     One sample from each batch should be  analyzed  in duplicate.  Within-run precision is
determined from duplicates based on relative percent difference (RPD) between the samples with
an acceptance limit of a RPD £ 10%.

Accuracy

     Accuracy is determined by analysis of a standard reference material (SRM).  Acceptable limits
for accuracy should be ±10% from the known concentration of the standard or within the accuracy
windows supplied by the reference material manufacturer, whichever is larger.

Method Blanks

     Two blank crucibles (accelerator only) are analyzed before the run and one blank crucible is
also analyzed in the middle and at the end of each analytical run. The concentration of each blank
should be less than or equal to the instrument detection limit. All results should be blank corrected
using the mean of the acceptable method blank readings.

-------
                                                            Chapter:
                                                            Version:
                                                            Date:
                                                            Page:
                                               20
                                               2.1
                                               May 22, 1995
                                               5 of 6
Quality Control Preparation Sample

     A matrix matched in-house quality control preparation sample (QCPS) should be analyzed once
per analytical run. This sample is used to monitor accuracy and tang-term between-run precision.
Accuracy of the QCPS should be within ± 10% of the tang-term mean. Between-run precision can
be determined by analyzing the QCPS and calculating the cumulative long-term standard deviation.
If values plotted on a control chart deviate from the tang-term mean by more than three standard
deviations, the run should be completely reanalyzed, including all digestion and quantification steps.

Suggested Run Format

MB, MB, Samples 1 to 8, QCPS,
Samples 9 to 16, MB, DUP,
Samples 16 to 25, SRM,
Samples 26 to 30, MB.
       where:  MB
               QCPS
               DUP
               SRM
method blank
quality control preparation sample
duplicate sample
standard reference material
 Calculations and Reporting

     Infra-red system: % S is read directly from the instrument.  The sample weight, as different
 from the standard, is taken into account on some instruments.

     Results are reported to two significant figures.  Results are read to the nearest 0.001%.
 Results should be blank corrected.
 References                                                \

 Beaton, J.D., G.R. Burns and J. Platou. 1968. Determination of sulphur in soils and plant material.
      Technical Bull. No. 14, The Sulphur Institute, Washington, D.C.

 Blanchar, R.W. 1986. Measurement of sulfur in soils and plants. In MA Tabatabai (ed.). Sulfur in
      agriculture. Amer. Soc. Agronomy. Madison, WI. Agronomy 27:457:490.

 Dick, W.A. and M.A. Tabatabai. 1979. Ion chromatographic determination of sulfate and nitrate in
      soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 46:847:852.

 Freney, J.R. and C.H. Williams. 1983. The sulphur cycle in soil. p. 139-201. In M.B. Ivanovand J.R.
      Freney (eds.). The global biogeochemical sulphur cycle. SCOPE Rep. no. 19. John Wiley and
      Sons, New York, NY.

 Hern, J.L 1984. Determination of total sulfur in plant materials using an automated sulphur analyzer.
      Comm. Soil Sci. Plant Anal. 15:99-107.

-------
                                                               Chapter:
                                                               Version:
                                                               Date:
                                                               Page:
20
2.1
May 22, 1995
6 of 6
Hogan, G.D. and Maynard, D.G. 1984. Sulphur analysis of environmental materials by vacuum
     inductively coupled plasma atomic emission spectrometry  (][CP-AES). p. 676-683 Ip Proc.
     Sulphur-84,  Int. Conf., Calgary, AJberta. June 1984.  The Sulphur Development Institute of
     Canada, Calgary.

Johnson, C.M. and H. Nishita. 1952. Microestimation of sulphur in plant materials, soils and irrigation
     waters. Anal. Chem. 24:736-742.

Maynard, D.G., Y.P. Kalra and F.G. Radford. 1987. Extraction and determination of sulfur in organic
     horizons of forest soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 51:801-806.

Nieto, K.F. and W.T. Frankenberger, Jr. 1985. Single column ion chromatography: I. Analysis of
     inorganic anions in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. J. 49:587-592.

Novozamsky, I., R. van Eck, JJ. van der Lee, V.J.G. Hauba and E. Temminghoff. 1986. Determination
     of total  sulphur and extractable  sulphate in plant materials by inductively-coupled plasma
     atomic emission spectrometry. Comm. Soil Sci. Plant Anal. 17:1147-1157.

Tabatabai, MA 1982. Sulfur. In A.L Page (ed.). Methods of soil analysis. Part 2. 2nd ed.
     Agronomy 9:501-538.

Tabatabai, M.A. and J.M. Bremner. 1970. Comparison of some methods for determination of total
     sulfur in soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 34:417-420.

Tabatabai, M.A. and J.M. Bremner. 1975. An alkaline oxidation method for the determination of total
     sulfur HI soils. Soil Sci. Soc. Am. Proc. 34:62-65.

Technfcon. 1972. Sulfate in water and wastewater. Industrial method no. 118-71W. Technicon
     Industrial Systems, Tarrytown, NY.

White, Jr., R.T. and G.E Douthit. 1985. Use of microwave oven and nitric acid-hydrogen peroxide
     digestion to prepare botanical materials for elemental analysis by inductively coupled argon
     plasma emission spectroscopy. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 68:766-769.
                                                   * IT.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1995 - 650-006/2205&

-------